Home

RSM-8R8

1. Access via Local PC Your PC must be connected to an TSM RSM Serial Port the Serial Port must be configured for Any to Any Mode and your PC must include a communications program Serial Port 1 is designated as a Set Up Port and by default is configured for communication with a local control device Basic Configuration To access command mode via the Text Interface proceed as follows Notes When communicating with the unit for the first time you will not be able to contact the unit via Telnet until you have accessed command mode via Local PC or SSH Client and used the Network Parameters Menu to enable Telnet as described in Section 5 9 Some TSM RSM series units include an optional secondary Ethernet Port in addition to the primary Ethernet port in order to allow connection to both a primary and secondary network When connecting only one network cable to a TSM RSM unit that includes two Ethernet ports make certain to connect the cable to Port ETHO the upper Ethernet Port 1 Contact the TSM RSM Unit a Via Local PC Start your communications program and press Enter Wait for the connect message then proceed to Step 2 b Via Network The TSM RSM includes a default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 and a default IPv4 format subnet mask 255 255 255 0 This allows you to contact the unit from any network node on the same subnet without first assigning an IP Address to the unit For more information p
2. As described below switching and reboot commands can be applied to only one Switched AC Outlet or to an assortment of outlets Note When switching and reboot operations are initiated Boot Sequence Delay times and user defined Plug Priority values will be applied as described in Section 5 7 1 Switch Several Plugs To apply a command to several plugs enter the numbers or names for the plugs separated by a plus sign 4 or a comma For example to switch plugs 1 3 and 4 Off enter either of the following commands OFF 1 344 Enter or OFF 1 3 4 Enter Note When the or are used do not enter spaces between the plug name or number and the plus sign or comma 2 Switch a Series of Plugs To apply a command to a series of plugs enter the number for the plugs that mark the beginning and end of the series separated by a colon For example to switch On plugs 1 through 3 enter the following ON 1 3 Enter 3 All Plugs To apply a command to all plugs enter an asterisk in place of the name or number For example to Boot all plugs enter the following BO Enter Note When this command is invoked by an account that permits only User level command access it will be applied only to the plugs that are allowed for that account Operation 9 4 Manual Operation In addition to the command driven functions available via the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface some TSM RSM functions can also be cont
3. Availability Administrator Format PNA Enter RB Reboot Options Displays a menu that is used to configure Scheduled Reboots and Ping No Answer Reboots Scheduled Reboots allow the devices connected to an RSM xRy Series unit s switched outlets to be rebooted on a regular basis according to a user defined schedule Ping No Answer Reboots allow the RSM xRy Series unit to automatically reboot specific outlets when a user specified IP address does not respond to a Ping command For more information on Reboot options please refer to Section 6 Notes This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The RB command is only available on RSM xhy Series units If desired the Ping No Answer Reboot function can also be configured to send email notification whenever a Ping No Answer Reboot is generated For more information please refer to Section 7 4 Availability Administrator Format RB Enter AC Alarm Configuration Parameters Displays a menu that is used to configure and enable the TSM RSM s monitoring and alarm functions For more information on Alarm Configuration please refer to Section 7 Availability Administrator Format Ac Enter 17 16 Command Reference Guide l Reboot System Default Reinitializes the TSM RSM unit and offers the option to keep user defined parameters or reset to default parameters As described in Sections 5 10 1 and 15 3 the I command can also be
4. Notes In order for this alarm to provide notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for this alarm to provide notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for this alarm to provide notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 In order for the Lost Communication Alarm to function the Heartbeat parameter must be enabled at each serial port that you wish to monitor For example in order to monitor a WTI device that is connected to Serial Port 3 the Heartbeat function must be enabled at Serial Port 3 To configure the Lost Communication Alarm access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands Enable the Heartbeat function and select the Any to Any port mode at the desired Serial Port as described in Section 5 8 2 and then proceed as follows Notes The Lost Communication Alarm will not function correctly if target Serial Ports are not configured for Any to Any Mode or if the Heartbeat function is not enabled at those ports In order for the Lost Communication Alarm to function correctly it may be necessary to update the firmware on your remote WTI equipment The Lost Communication Alarm Configuration Menu offers the followin
5. c RSM 16 Series and RSM 16R16 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2101 through 2116 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2117 d TSM 24 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2101 through 2124 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2125 e TSM 40 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2101 through 2140 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2141 Standard Telnet Direct Connection without Password a RSM 2R4 Series Units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2301 and 2302 Internal Modem Port Not Present b RSM 8 Series TSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2301 through 2308 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2309 c RSM 16 Series and RSM 16R16 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2301 through 2316 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2317 e TSM 24 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2301 through 2324 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2325 TSM 40 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2301 through 2340 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2341 10 4 Telnet amp SSH Functions SSH Direct Connection with Password 8 RSM 2R4 Series Units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2201 and 2202 Internal Modem Port Not Present RSM 8 Series TSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2201 through 2208 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2209 RSM 16 Series and RSM 1
6. TSM and RSM Series Units 00 0 eee 7 14 7 4 2 Ping No Answer Alarm RSM xRy Series Units 00 7 15 7 5 The Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm 0 2 cece 7 17 7 6 The Power Cycle Alarm 2 0 ccc tte eee 7 19 7 7 Buffer Threshold Alarm 0002 45 sq o m ek See nee 7 20 7 8 The Plug Current Alarm RSM 8R8 CM Series Only 2 00s eeeee 7 22 7 9 The No Dialtone Alarm alise ee eee cee eee 7 25 7 10 The Lost Voltage Alarm Dual Power Inlet Units Only 0 00005 7 27 8 The Status Scr eriS lt i ccsicsissrsarisns esans ae epee ee ae ew wee anal a el ae 8 1 8 1 Product Status odo bs Rem addin Pier Rb bed center sob eld om ded ge 8 1 8 2 The Network Status Screen ne 8 1 8 8 The Port Status Screen lsssseseeeeeeeeee nn 8 2 8 4 The Port and Plug Status Screens 1 0 0 0 eects 8 3 8 5 The Plug Group Status Screen 0 0 2 0 ccc ees 8 4 8 6 The Current Metering Status Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only 8 5 8 7 The Current History Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only isluseussss 8 6 8 8 The Power Range Status Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only sussuuu 8 7 8 9 The Power History Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only 0 00 eee eee 8 8 8 10 The Port Diagnostics Screen 1 0 ett 8 9 8 11 Alias Status Screen 0 teen nnn 8 9 8 12 The Alarm Status Screen nen 8 9 8 13 The Port Parameters
7. between each plug number To apply the command to a range of plugs enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range separated by a colon character To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your account enter an asterisk character 1X Optional Suppresses the command confirmation prompt Examples Assume that your account allows access to Plug 2 and Plug 3 To switch Plugs 2 and 3 on your TSM RSM unit Off without displaying the optional command confirmation prompt invoke either of the following command lines OFF 2 3 Y Enter or OF 2 3 yY Enter DPL Set All Plugs to Default States Sets all switched outlets to their user defined default state For information on setting outlet defaults please refer to Section 5 7 Notes This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The DPL command is only available on RSM xRy Series units When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode it will be applied to all outlets on the unit When invoked in User Mode the command will only be applied to the plugs that are allowed by your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format DPL Y Enter Where Y is an optional command argument which can be included to suppress the command confirmation prompt 17 11 Command Reference Guide U Send Parameters to File Sends all TSM RSM configuration parameters to an ASCII text file as describ
8. 5 3 6 Power Configuration RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only 5 21 6 4 User ACCOUNTS 5 woe whee de TER eed bot uoc pe uro edit eed 5 22 5 4 1 Command Access Levels 0 000 cece ett 5 22 5 4 2 Granting Serial Port Access 0 0 cece cette ee 5 23 5 4 3 Granting Plug Access 0 eect n 5 24 iv Table of Contents 5 Basic Configuration continued 5 5 Managing User Accounts llis n 5 25 5 5 1 Viewing User Accounts 5 25 5 5 2 Adding User Accounts 0 cece etna 5 25 5 5 8 Modifying User Accounts 0 cee ee 5 28 5 5 4 Deleting User Accounts lslseleeeeee ee 5 28 5 6 The Plug Group Directory lssesseseseee eh 5 29 5 6 1 Viewing Plug Groups ssssessesee ee n 5 30 5 6 2 Adding Plug Groups 00 cece eere 5 30 5 6 3 Modifying Plug Groups lssssseeeee III 5 31 5 6 4 Deleting Plug Groups ssssssssseseee eee 5 31 5 7 Defining Plug Parameters 0 0c cect mh 5 32 5 7 1 The Boot Priority Parameter 0 eee eee 5 34 5 7 1 1 Example 1 Change Plug 3 to Prioriy1 5 34 5 7 1 2 Example 2 Change Plug 4 to Priority2 5 35 5 8 Serial Port Configuration lisse n 5 36 5 8 1 RS232 Port Modes 0 cece eae 5 37 5 8 2 The Serial Port Configuration Menu 0 00 c eee ee 5 38 5 8 3 Copying Parameters to Several Serial Ports Text
9. On No Password Uses port number 2300 On Password Uses port number 2100 Note that when the password is enabled you will be prompted to enter a valid TSM RSM username and password Modem Hunt Raw Offers three different configuration options Off Disabled On No Password and On Password Each of the On options selects a default port number for modem pooling On No Password Uses port number 3300 On Password Uses port number 3100 Note that when the password is enabled you will be prompted to enter a valid TSM RSM username and password In order to use Modem Pooling functions the TSM RSM must be configured as follows Telnet Access and or Raw Socket Access must be enabled Network Parameters Menu Modem Hunt Telnet and or Modem Hunt Raw must be enabled Network Parameters Menu The Port Mode Port Parameters Menu for each TSM RSM serial port attached to an external modem must be set to Modem Mode Direct Connect must be enabled Port Parameters Menu for each TSM RSM serial port attached to an external modem In addition you must also acquire the following information from the TSM RSM and enter it into your Serial Port Redirector software The Port Number shown above for the desired TSM RSM Modem Hunt Telnet or Modem Hunt Raw option The IPv4 or IPv6 format IP address for the TSM RSM unit To create an outbound modem connection start your communications program e g Hypert
10. Resend Delay Determines how long the RSM 8R8 CM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will send initial notification when it detects that a current consumption has risen above the defined High trigger value and then send a second notification when it determines that current consumption has fallen below the Low trigger value Default On 7 23 Alarm Configuration Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Defaul
11. Table of Contents Operation continued 9 3 Controlling Power Text Interface lissseseseeeeee eh 9 14 9 3 1 The Port and Plug Status Screen Text Interface 0000 9 14 9 3 2 Switching and Reboot Commands Text Interface 00 9 15 9 3 2 1 Applying Commands to Several Plugs Text Interface 9 17 9 4 ManualOperation llsssseeeleeeee 9 18 9 5 Logging Out of Command Mode 0 cee ees 9 18 9 6 Emergency Shut Off Function 2 0 0 0 cc eee eae 9 18 Telnet amp SSH Functions 4 o cen cee ete nhan E m 10 1 10 1 Network Port Numbers 0 0 cece m 10 1 10 2 SSH Encryptioni lues Ree EE ueni RR RU eta e be ded EROS 10 1 10 3 The Direct Connect Feature cette 10 2 10 3 1 Standard Telnet Protocol SSH and Raw Socket 00 005 10 2 10 3 2 Configuration 0 0 n 10 2 10 3 3 Connecting to a Serial Port using Direct Connect 10 4 10 3 4 Terminating a Direct Connect Session iilii eese esses 10 7 10 4 IP Alidsing zioni RIS RUE ur Edere eS week e Faux qr EO Nd ta eee 10 8 10 5 Creating an Outbound Telnet Connection eese 10 9 10 6 Creating an Outbound SSH Connection 0 ee ees 10 10 Syslog MeSSageS xx ar alee aene tasers ese E ceye ee a6 wae eis D Qe GO eee Ba 11 1 11 1 Configuration ert trece iet teet Ue Caetera dene go dede 11 1 SNMP ELICIT 12 1 12 1 Configuration ie ED Rh
12. To restore the previously saved configuration proceed as follows 1 Access command move via the Text Interface using a username password that permits access to Administrator level commands see Section 5 1 1 2 Atthe RSM command prompt type I and press Enter The TSM RSM will display a submenu that offers several different reboot options 3 Atthe submenu select Item 4 Reboot amp Restore Last Known Working Configuration type 4 and then press Enter 4 The TSM RSM will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored 15 5 16 Upgrading TSM RSM Firmware When new improved versions of the TSM RSM firmware become available either the Firmware Upgrade Utility recommended or the Upgrade Firmware function Text Interface only can be used to update the unit The following Section describes the procedure for updating the TSM RSM unit using the Firmware Upgrade Utility or the Upgrade Firmware function 16 1 WMU Enterprise Management Software Recommended The preferred method for updating TSM RSM units is via the WMU Enterprise Management Software that is included with the unit The WMU software allows you to manage firmware updates for multiple WTI units from a single interface For a description of the process for managing firmware updates via the WMU please refer to the WMU user s guide which can be downloaded from the WTI User s Guide Archive at http www wti com t product manuals aspx Note that
13. a Set Trap which indicates that the alarm has been triggered and a Clear Trap which indicates that the alarm has been cleared overCurrentInitialSetTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Over Current Initial Alarm has been triggered overCurrentInitialClearTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Over Current Initial Alarm has been cleared overCurrentCriticalSetTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Over Current Critical Alarm has been triggered overCurrentCriticalClearTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Over Current Critical Alarm has been cleared overTemperatureInitialSetTrap Indicates that the Over Temperature Initial Alarm has been triggered The trap will also include a numerical value that indicates the current unit temperature overTemperatureInitialClearTrap Indicates that the Over Temperature Initial Alarm has been cleared overTemperatureCriticalSetTrap Indicates that the Over Temperature Critical Alarm has been triggered The trap will also include a numerical value that indicates the current unit temperature overTemperatureCriticalClearTrap Indicates that the Over Temperature Critical Alarm has been cleared pingNoAnswerSetTrap Indicates that the Ping No Answer Alarm has been triggered The trap will also include a numerical value that indicates the IP address of the device that failed to respond to the ping comman
14. do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode via modem On Callback ONLY With Password Prompt Callbacks will be performed for user accounts that include a Callback Number and the username password prompt will be displayed when the user s modem answers users will be required to re enter their username password when their modem answers Accounts that do not include a Callback Number will not be able to access command mode via modem Callback Attempts The number of times that the TSM RSM will attempt to contact the Callback number Default 3 attempts Basic Configuration Callback Delay The amount of time that the TSM RSM will wait between Callback attempts Default 30 seconds Notes After configuring and enabling Callback Security you must then define a callback phone number for each desired user account as described in Section 5 5 in order for this feature to function properly When using the On Callback With Password Prompt option it is important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback number will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification 5 3 5 Scripting Options The Scripting Options submenu provides access to parameters that are used to set up the TSM RSM unit for running various scripts Notes The functions provided by the Scripting Options menu are intended for use in applications where scripts are employed to control TSM
15. the bottom Network Port is ETH1 When connecting only a single network cable to an RSM 8R8 series unit that includes the optional secondary Network Port make certain to connect to Port ETHO Serial Ports For connection to console ports on target devices Standard RJ45 connectors configured as DCE ports For more information on connecting devices to the serial ports please refer to Section 4 5 and Appendix B and Appendix C ACTIVITY Indicators A series of LEDs which will light when a CTS signal is detected and will flash during data transmission to indicate activity at the corresponding port RESET Button Restarts the RSM 8R8 as described in Section 2 11 DEFAULT Button Switches all plugs Off or sets plugs to default values as described in Section 2 11 ON Indicator An LED Indicator which lights when AC Power is applied to the unit Unit Description RDY Indicator Ready Flashes to indicate that the unit is ready to receive commands DCD Indicator The Data Carrier Detect indicator Output Status Indicators A series of eight LED indicators which light when power is applied to the corresponding switched outlet Note Providing that power is still present at the secondary power inlet the Output Status indicators will blink on and off when the primary power source is lost or disconnected Unit Description PRIMARY SECONDARY Figure 2 12 RSM 8R8 1 Back Panel PRIMARY SECONDARY A1 SOS oo
16. the prompt for the Break on Disconnect option will read On Break on Disconnect indicating that both the Direct Connect feature and the Break on Disconnect feature are enabled Notes e f you intend to create Raw Socket connections to TSM RSM serial ports then the Raw Socket Access feature must also be enabled at the Network Port as described in Section 5 9 2 e f you intend to use SSH to establish direct connections to the TSM RSM the Direct Connect ON PASSWORD option must be selected f Administrator level commands are disabled at the Network Port then accounts that permit Administrator level commands will not be able to initiate a Direct Connection f Administrator level commands are enabled at the Network Port then accounts with Administrator level access and accounts without Administrator level access will both be allowed to establish Direct Connections f your user account does not permit access to the target port the connection will be refused 10 5 Telnet amp SSH Functions 10 3 3 Connecting to a Serial Port using Direct Connect Direct Connect TCP port numbers are as follows 1 Standard Telnet Direct Connection with Password a RSM 2R4 Series Units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2101 and 2102 Internal Modem Port Not Present b RSM 8 Series TSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2101 through 2108 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2109
17. 0 enhn n n n n nnn 6 1 6 1 Ping No Answer Reboot 0 0 cece eee eee nen 6 2 6 1 1 Adding Ping No Answer Reboots 00 00 e eee eee eee 6 2 6 1 2 Viewing Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles 0 0 0 e eee aes 6 4 6 1 3 Modifying Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles 0 0 0 e ee aes 6 4 6 1 4 Deleting Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles 0 0 0 eeeaee 6 4 6 2 Scheduled Reboot 0 cece eee eee 6 5 6 2 1 Adding Scheduled Reboots 00 0 c eee ete 6 5 6 2 2 Viewing Scheduled Reboot Actions 0 00 c eee eee eee 6 6 6 2 3 Modifying Scheduled Reboots 0 0 e eee eee eee 6 6 6 2 4 Deleting Scheduled Reboots 00 cece eet 6 6 Table of Contents 7 Alarm Configuration err RR Rer RE ERR Mek teas en Oe ea 7 1 7 1 The Over Current Alarms RSM 8R8 CM Series Only 0000e ee eae 7 2 7 1 1 Over Current Alarms Load Shedding and Auto Recovery 7 4 7 2 The Over Temperature Alarms 7 6 7 2 1 Over Temperature Alarms Load Shedding and Auto Recovery 7 8 7 3 The Lost Communication Alarm ssssleleese nes 7 10 7 4 The Ping No Answer Alarm leleeeeee e 7 12 7 4 1 Ping No Answer Notification TSM and RSM Series Units 7 12 7 4 1 1 Defining Ping No Answer IP Addresses TSM and RSM Series Units 00 0 0 ee 7 12 7 4 1 2 Configuring the Ping No Answer Alarm
18. 1 ALL EXCEPT 192 255 255 192 168 112 112 05 Deny List 1 192 255 255 192 168 112 112 05 Notes When defining a line in the Allow or Deny list that includes several IP addresses each individual address is separated by either a space a comma or a comma and a space as shown in Example 2 above Take care when using the ALL wild card When ALL is included in the Allow list it should always include an EXCEPT operator in order to allow the unit to proceed to the Deny list and determine any addresses you wish to deny 5 9 4 Static Route The Static Route menu allows you to type in Linux routing commands that will be automatically executed each time that the unit powers up or reboots In the Text Interface the Static Route menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface the Static Route menu is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration link Note that parameters defined via this menu will be applied to both IPv4 and IPv6 communication 5 9 5 Domain Name Server The DNS menu is used to select IPv4 or IPv6 format IP addresses for Domain Name Servers When web and network addresses are entered the Domain Name Server interprets domain names e g www wti com and translates them into IP addresses In the Text Interface the DNS menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface the DNS menu is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration
19. 1 2 Installing the Power Supply Cable Keeper 0 00 0 eee ee eee 4 1 4 4 8 DC Powered Units 0 0c cece n 4 2 4 2 Connecting the Network Cable 0 00 anaana aeaa 4 2 4 3 The Internal Modem Port 2 2 ee ee 3h n 4 2 4 4 Connection to Switched Outlets 0 0 0 c cette eee 4 3 4 5 Connecting Devices to the TSM RSM Serial Ports 000 c eee eee eee 4 3 4 6 Emergency Shut Off Function 0 00 0 4 3 5 Basic Configuration 452 zur cea a ew ee ee a RR eae we RC wee 8 8 A wee RC A 5 1 5 1 Communicating with the TSM RSM Unit 0 eee 5 1 5 1 1 The Text Interface 2 225 esse Rom RR ene eaes 5 1 5 1 2 The Web Browser Interface lille 5 3 5 3 Access Vid PDA Lois ei seed be RR PRERRARRQERSERTRG MEE 5 4 5 2 Configuration Menus 0 ee e ete 5 5 5 3 Defining System Parameters iles ees 5 6 5 3 1 The Real Time Clock and Calendar sees esses 5 9 5 3 2 The Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Feature 0 000 5 11 5 3 3 Log Configuration lseseieseseese n 5 14 5 3 3 1 The Audit Log and Alarm Log Configuration Options 5 14 5 3 3 2 The Temperature Log eene 5 15 5 3 3 3 Reading Downloading and Erasing Logs 5 15 5 3 4 Callback Security 0 0 0 eens 5 16 5 3 5 Scripting Options 0 0 cee 5 17 5 3 5 1 Automated Mode 0 0 0 eee eee 5 20
20. 13 6 Operation via SNMP 13 6 Viewing Unit Status via SNMP Status of various components of the TSM RSM can be retrieved via SNMP Plug Status and Environmental Status are currently supported 13 6 1 System Status Ethernet Port Mac Addresses Note Ethernet Port 1 is only available on RSM TSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet Port To display the Ethernet Port Mac Adaress for units that include only one Ethernet Port use the environmentMacEth0 option The Mac Address for Ethernet Ports 0 and 1 can be displayed using the command below environmentUnitTable environmentMacEthO The Mac Address for Ethernet Port 0 environmentUnitTable environmentMacEth1 The Mac Address for Ethernet Port 1 13 6 2 Plug Status Note Power Control features are not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM series units The power control functions described here are only available on RSM xRy Series units The status of each plug in the system can be retrieved using the command below plugTable plugStatus The status of the plug 0 Plug is OFF 1 Plug is ON 13 6 3 Unit Temperature Status The temperature status can be retrieved for various variables for the TSM RSM unit The environmentUnitTable contains one row environmentUnitTable environmentUnitTemperature The temperature of the TSM RSM unit environmentUnitTable environmentUnitName Returns the specific model number for the TS
21. Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines which outlet s this account will be allowed to control Defaults Administrator and SuperUser All Plugs On User and ViewOnly undefined Notes Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power control functions are not present on standard TSM Series and RSM Series units Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all plugs ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On Off status of plugs but are limited to the plugs specified by the account ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot commands Plug Group Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines which Plug Groups this account will be allowed to control Plug Groups allow you to define a selection of outlets and then quickly assign those outlets to new accounts by allowing the account to access the Plug Group For more information on Plug Groups please refer to Section 5 6 Default undefined Notes Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power control functions are not present on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units In order to use this feature Plug Groups must first be defined as described in Section 5 6 Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all plug groups ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the On Off status of plug groups but are limited to the plug
22. Current Metering Status Screen Displays current voltage and power readings for an individual plug or outlet where s is the name or number of the desired outlet Displays current voltage and power readings for two or more specific outlets where s is the number or name of each desired outlet A plus sign is entered between each outlet number or name Displays current voltage and power readings for a range of outlets where s is the number or name of the outlet at the beginning and end of the range of desired outlets A colon is entered between the two outlet numbers or names that mark the beginning of the range and the end of the range Displays current voltage and power readings for Branch A Displays current voltage and power readings for Branch B Notes In the Text Interface when current voltage and power readings are displayed for a single outlet pair of outlets or range of outlets readings for each outlet specified will be displayed as three values separated by commas Current will be displayed first then voltage then power When Current Usage is reported as a percentage of maximum current the value show will reflect the percentage of real maximum current used rather than the percentage of de rated maximum current used To display the Current Metering Status Screen proceed as follows Text Interface Type M and press Enter Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Current Metering link on
23. Department A by either including the Dept A Plug Group name in a BOOT command line via the Text Interface or by using the Plug Group Control menu via the Web Browser Interface The Plug Group Directory function is only available when you have logged into command mode using an account that permits Administrator commands In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface the Plug Group Directory menu offers the following functions View Plug Group Directory Displays currently defined plug access rights for any TSM RSM Plug Group as described in Section 5 6 1 Add Plug Group to Directory Creates new Plug Groups and allows you to assign plug access rights to each group as described in Section 5 6 2 Modify Plug Group Directory This option is used to edit or change plug access rights for each Plug Group as described in Section 5 6 3 Delete Plug Group from Directory Clears Plug Groups that are no longer needed as described in Section 5 6 4 5 29 Basic Configuration 5 6 1 Viewing Plug Groups Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Directory is not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units The View Plug Group Directory option allows you to view the configuration of each Plug Group Note that the View Plug Group Directory function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level co
24. Direct Connection to this port using Raw Socket protocol 5 42 Basic Configuration Syslog The Syslog feature is used to create records of each buffer event As event records are created they are sent to a Syslog Daemon at an IP address defined via the Network Parameters menu For more information please refer to Section 11 The Syslog feature offers three possible settings Default Off Off Syslog disabled Default On Not Connected Messages will only be generated when a user is not connected to a buffer port either by C or direct connect This prevents information captured from the attached device from being put into Syslog messages while a user is connected to a buffer port On Always All captured information will be sent out via Syslog message whether a user is connected or not Notes Syslog is only available at Buffer Mode Ports This option is not available to serial port 1 because port 1 cannot be configured as a Buffer Mode Port The Port Parameters menu also offers two additional items used to set the priority of Syslog messages generated by this port Facility The facility under which this port will log messages Default Local 0 Level The severity or priority of messages generated by this port Default Emergency Buffer Threshold Enables disables the Buffer Threshold function for Buffer Mode ports and sets the level that will generate traps and or Buffer Thresh
25. Enterprise Management Solution provides a centralized interface that can be used to configure manage and control multiple WTI out of band management devices spread throughout a large corporate network infrastructure When installed at your network operation center or support facility the WMU eliminates the need to individually access WTI units in order to perform firmware updates control power switching functions edit user accounts and perform other management and control functions The WMU software and user s guide can be downloaded at ftp wtiftp wti com pub TechSupport WMU WtiManagementUtilityInstall exe This completes the Quick Start procedure for the TSM RSM Prior to placing the unit into operation it is recommended to refer to the remainder of this user s guide for important information regarding advanced configuration capabilities and more detailed operation instructions If you have further questions regarding the TSM RSM unit please contact WTI Customer Support as described in Appendix D 4 Hardware Installation 4 1 Connecting the Power Supply Cables 4 1 1 Connect the TSM RSM to Your Power Supply Refer to the cautions listed below and at the beginning of this User s Guide and then connect the TSM RSM unit to an appropriate power supply A CAUTIONS A Before attempting to install this unit please review the warnings and cautions listed at the front of the user s guide This device should only be operated
26. For example if the Power Cycle Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Power Cycle Alarm Configuration 7 7 Buffer Threshold Alarm The Buffer Threshold Alarm can provide notification when the amount of data stored in the buffer for a given serial port exceeds the Buffer Threshold value that has been defined for that port as described in Section 5 8 2 When the amount of data in the buffer for a given serial port exceeds the user defined Buffer Threshold value the TSM RSM can provide notification via Email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap Notes The Buffer Threshold Alarm can only be applied to ser
27. Groups are displayed In SuperUser Mode User Mode and ViewOnly Mode the Plug Group Status Screen will only include the Plug Groups allowed by your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format S Enter SN Display Network Status Displays the Network Status Screen which lists current network connections to the TSM RSM s Network Port For more information please refer to Section 8 2 Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format SN Enter RN Network Configuration Summary Displays a screen that lists currently selected communication settings LDAP status RADIUS status Email Messaging status NTP status and PPP status Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format RN Enter SA IP Alias Status Displays the Alias Status Screen which lists currently selected port names alias IP addresses and Direct Connect status for the TSM RSM s serial ports For more information please refer to Section 8 11 Note When the Alias Status Screen is displayed by an Administrator or SuperUser level account the screen will display the status of all ports If the Alias Status Screen is displayed by a User or ViewOnly level account the screen will only display the status of the ports specifically allowed by the account Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format SA Enter 17 4 Command Reference Guide N View Connection with Echo When two TSM RSM port
28. Interface Only 5 45 5 9 Network Configuration 0 0 00 ccc hn 5 46 5 9 1 Network Port Parameters lsseeele eA 5 48 5 9 2 Network Parameters ssussslsusleiee ee s rus 5 49 5 9 2 1 Modem Pooling lssseee ett 5 54 5 9 9 IP Security cared boat ved bio dooney lou bs ae a aa aa Babe 5 55 5 9 3 1 Adding IP Addresses to the Allow and Deny Lists 5 56 5 9 3 2 Linux Operators and Wild Cards 0 0000 eee eaee 5 57 5 9 3 3 IP Security Examples 0 000 c eee eee eee 5 57 5 9 4 Static ROUTE coo eee Eos RHEIN pea eb ed RP PER 5 58 5 9 5 Domain Name Server 00 000 cece ect eee 5 58 5 9 6 SNMP Access Parameters 0000 cece eee eee 5 59 5 9 7 SNMP Trap Parameters 00 000 c eee tee 5 61 5 9 8 LDAP Parameters ccc este se eR eo epee Kae ee wed ae C RA 5 62 5 9 8 1 Adding LDAP Groups esee ere 5 64 5 9 82 Viewing LDAP Groups sss eere 5 65 5 9 8 3 Modifying LDAP Groups sse eere 5 65 5 9 8 4 Deleting LDAP Groups 0 00 cece eee 5 65 5 9 9 TACACS Parameters n 5 66 5 9 10 RADIUS Parameters lssssseseeeeee nh 5 69 5 9 10 1 Dictionary Support for RADIUS 0 00 0 eee eee 5 70 5 9 11 Email Messaging Parameters 5 72 5 10 Save User Selected Parameters 0 0 0 cece ttt ene 5 73 5 10 1 Restore Configuration liess 5 73 6 Reboot Options 0
29. Message The Status Screen will be re displayed each time a command is successfully executed To display the Port and Plug Status Screen via the Text Interface type S and press Enter The TSM RSM will display a screen that shows port status to display plug status press Enter or press Esc to exit from the Port and Plug Status Screen Operation 9 5 2 Switching and Reboot Commands Text Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units do not support power control functions These commands can be used to switch or reboot the RSM xRy Series unit s switched plugs and can also be used to set plugs to the user defined Power Up Default values Plugs may be specified by name or number Notes If an asterisk appears in the Status column for any given plug this indicates that the plug is currently busy processing a previously issued command If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already busy completing a previous command then the new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands Administrator and SuperUser level accounts can use the Port and Plug Status Screen to display information for all serial ports and switched outlets User and ViewOnly level accounts can only use the Port and Plug Status Screen to display information for serial ports and outlets that are
30. Name Servers as described in Section 5 9 5 The IP Address P t P and Subnet Mask parameters cannot be defined by the user and will be automatically supplied by the ISP when a PPP communication is started PPP Phone Number The phone number for the line that will be used for PPP communication Default undefined User Name The user name for the ISP account that will be used for PPP communication Default undefined Password The password for the ISP count that will be used for PPP communication Default undefined IP Address The temporary IP address that will be assigned to the PPP communication session by the ISP Note that this item cannot be defined by the user and will be automatically supplied by the ISP when a PPP communication session is started Default undefined P t P Note that this item cannot be defined by the user and will be automatically supplied by the ISP when a PPP communication session is started Default undefined Subnet Mask Note that this item cannot be defined by the user and will be automatically supplied by the ISP when a PPP communication session is started Default undefined Heartbeat The Heartbeat parameter can be used in conjunction with the Lost Communication alarm to provide notification when a WTI device that has been attached to one of the TSM RSM s serial ports ceases to function Normally the TSM RSM will send the Heartbeat message to an attached WTI
31. Outbound SSH Connection The TSM RSM s SSH command can be used to create an outbound SSH connection In order to use the SSH command you must access the TSM RSM s Text Interface command mode using an account that permits SSH Access and Outbound Access via one of the TSM RSM s Serial RS232 Ports as described below Notes In order for the SSH command to function SSH Access and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 5 5 The SSH command is only available via the Text Interface f you have logged in via the Network Port the SSH command will not function To create an outbound SSH connection access the Text Interface via a free Serial Port using an account that permits SSH Access and Outbound Access and then invoke the SSH command using the following format SSH ip 1 username Enter Where ip Is the target IP address 1 Lowercase letter L Indicates that the next argument will be the log on name username Is the username that you wish to use to log in to the target device For example to create an outbound SSH connection to a device at IP Address 255 255 255 255 with the username employee access the Text Interface command mode via a free TSM RSM Serial Port using an account that permits SSH Access and Outbound Access and invoke the SSH command as follows SSH 255 255 255 255 1 employee Enter 10 10 11 Syslog Messages The Syslog featu
32. Port To view the Port Status Screen via the Text Interface type S and press Enter To view the Port Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the Port Status link when the flyout menu appears click on the Serial Port Status link Notes On TSM 8 Series RSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Port 9 is the Internal Modem Port RSM 2R4 Series units do not include an Internal Modem Port On RSM 16 Series units and RSM 16R16 Series units Port 17 is the Internal Modem Port On TSM 24 Series units Port 25 is the Internal Modem Port On TSM 40 Series units Port 41 is the Internal Modem Port The Modem Port is not present on TSM models that end with the NMI suffix The Status Screens 8 4 The Port and Plug Status Screens On RSM xRy Series units the Port and Plug Status Screens will show the status of the both the serial ports and switched plugs The Port Status screen lists the user defined port name and port mode for each serial port as well as the buffer count connection status and the names of any user s currently accessing these ports The Plug Status screen shows the On Off status of the switched outlets and lists user defined Plug Names Boot Sequence Delay values and Default On Off settings Note In standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units Plug Status is not listed Instead standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units list only the Port Status
33. Port and then invoke the TELNET and or SSH commands to create an outbound connection For example to create an outbound Telnet connection first make certain that this option is enabled for both the serial port and the password account then access command mode via the Text Interface at a free serial port At the command prompt invoke the TELNET command as described in Section 10 5 Default Off Outbound Secure Level When Outbound Access is enabled this parameter is used to determine whether outbound connections will be allowed to be established via both the Serial Port and Network Port or via the Serial Port only Default Serial Only Note n the Text Interface the Outbound Secure Level prompt can be found in the Outbound Access submenu Raw Socket Access Enables Disables Raw Socket Protocol access to the Network Port via Direct Connect and selects either port 3001 or 23 for Raw Socket Access Default Off Modem Hunt Telnet This option enables the TSM RSM to support modem pooling in conjunction with third party Serial Port Redirector software as described in Section 5 9 2 1 Default Off Modem Hunt Raw Same as Modem Hunt Telnet except this function uses a raw socket connection For more information please refer to Section 5 9 2 1 Default Off Note 7he Modem Hunt Telnet option is recommended for transmitting ASCII data and the Modem Hunt Raw option is recommended for transmitting binary data
34. RSM operation Improper use of Scripting Options menu functions can cause the TSM RSM unit to become unresponsive Prior to attempting to use the functions provided by the Scripting Options menu please contact WTI Technical Support as described in Appendix D in this User s Guide To access Scripting Options parameters via the Text Interface first type F and press Enter to display the System Parameters Menu then key in the number for the Scripting Options item and press Enter To access the Scripting Options parameters via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the General Parameters link wait for the flyout menu to appear then click on the Scripting Options link The Scripting Options menu allows the following parameters to be defined Command Confirmation RSM xRy Series Units Only When enabled a Sure prompt will be displayed before power switching and reboot commands are executed When disabled commands will be executed without further prompting Default On Automated Mode RSM xRy Series Units Only When enabled the unit will execute switching and reboot commands without displaying a confirmation prompt status screen or confirmation messages For more information please refer to Section 5 3 5 1 Default Off Note When the Automated Mode is enabled security functions are suppressed and users are able to access configuration menus and control plugs without entering a password If securi
35. RSM xRy Series units Power Control and Plug Status features are not available on standard TSM Series units and RSM Series units PDA users are not allowed to change or review TSM RSM configuration parameters For more information on these functions please refer to the appropriate section listed next to each function in the list above To configure the TSM RSM for access via PDA first consult your IT department for appropriate settings Access the TSM RSM command mode via the Text Interface or Web Browser interface as described in this section then configure the TSM RSM s Network Port accordingly as described in Section 5 9 In most cases this configuration will be adequate to allow communication with most PDAs Note however that if you wish to use a BlackBerry to contact the TSM RSM you must first make certain to configure the BlackBerry to support HTML tables as described below 1 Power on the BlackBerry and then click on the BlackBerry Internet Browser Icon 2 Press the Menu button and then choose Options 3 From the Options menu choose Browser Configuration then verify to make certain that Support HTML Tables is checked enabled 4 Pressthe Menu button and select Save Options When you have finished communicating with the TSM RSM via PDA it is important to always close the session using the PDA s menu functions rather than by simply closing the browser window in order to ensure that the TSM RSM has
36. Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 6 1 4 Deleting Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles After you have defined one or more Ping No Answer profiles you can delete profiles that are no longer needed using the Delete Ping No Answer feature In order to delete an existing Ping No Answer profile you must access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Ping No Answer menu s Delete Ping No Answer function Reboot Options 6 2 Scheduled Reboot The Scheduled Reboot feature can be used to reboot one or more outlets according to a user defined schedule or to automatically turn outlets Off and then On according to a user defined schedule In order to configure a Scheduled Reboot you must access command mode using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power switching and reboot functions are not supported on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units In the Text Interface the Scheduled Reboot configuration menu is accessed via the Reboot Options menu RB In the Web Browser Interface the Scheduled Reboot configuration menu is accessed via the Reboot Options link The Scheduled Reboot configuration menu can be used to Add Modify View or Delete Scheduled Reboot functions Note After you have finished defining or editing Scheduled R
37. Set Up Port or the Network Port 9 1 5 Buffer Mode The Buffer Mode allows collection of data from various devices without the requirement that all devices use the same communication parameters In addition Buffer Mode ports can also be configured to support the SYSLOG SNMP Trap and Buffer Threshold Alarm functions Notes Buffer Mode Ports cannot access command mode e Buffer Mode is not available to Port 1 the SetUp Port or the Network Port 9 1 3 1 Reading Data from Buffer Mode Ports Text Interface To check port buffers for stored data access command mode via the text interface using an account that permits Administrator SuperUser or User level commands and type S Enter to display the Port Status Screen The Buffer Count column in the Port Status Screen indicates how much data is currently being stored for each port To retrieve data from buffer memory go to a free Any to Any or Modem Mode Port then issue the R command using the following format R xx Enter Where xx is the number of the port buffer to be read Notes The R command is not available to ViewOnly level accounts Buffered data can only be retrieved via the Text Interface This function is not available in the Web Browser Interface In order to read data from a given port your account must allow access to that port When the R command is invoked the counter for the SNMP Trap function will also be reset Operation If the buffe
38. alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Buffer Threshold 7 21 Alarm Configuration 7 8 The Plug Current Alarm RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Plug Current Alarm allows you to monitor current consumption at each of the RSM 8R8 CM s switched outlets and generate an alarm when current exceeds a user defined High threshold or falls below a user defined Low threshold The Plug Current Alarm can also be applied to user defined Plug Groups in order to generate an alarm when total current consumption for the given Plug Group rises too high or falls too low Note Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM series units or standard RSM series units If desired the Plug Current Alarm can also be configured to automatically shut off individual plugs or user
39. allowed by the account Administrator or SuperUser level accounts can direct switching and reboot commands to all plugs User Level accounts can only direct switching and reboot commands to the plugs that are specifically allowed by that account RSM xRy Series units will display the Status Screen after commands are successfully completed When switching and reboot operations are initiated Boot Sequence Delay times and user defined Plug Priority values will be applied as described in Section 5 7 Text Interface commands are not case sensitive When used in On Off Reboot command lines plug names and plug group names are also not case sensitive When switching and reboot commands are executed the RSM xRy Series unit will display a Sure prompt wait for user response and then complete the command The unit will pause for a moment while the command is executed and then return to the Port and Plug Status Screen To Switch Plugs or initiate a Reboot Cycle proceed as follows 1 Switch Plug s On To power on a plug or Plug Group type ON n and press Enter Where n is the number or name of the desired plug or Plug Group For example ON 1 Enter or ON ROUTER Enter Operation Switch Plug s Off To power off a plug or Plug Group type OFF n and press Enter Where n is the number or name of the desired plug or Plug Group Note that the oFF command can also be entered as OF For example OFF 2 En
40. also be used to ping any user defined IP address in order to make certain that the IP address is responding 5 68 Basic Configuration 5 9 10 RADIUS Parameters In the Text Interface the RADIUS Parameters menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu N for IPv4 parameters or N6 for IPv6 parameters In the Web Browser Interface both IPv4 and IPv6 parameters are defined via a single RADIUS Parameters menu which is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration link The RADIUS Configuration Menus offer the following options Enable Enables disables the RADIUS feature at the Network Port Default Off Primary Address IPv4 Defines the IP address or domain name for your primary RADIUS server when IPv4 protocol is used Default undefined Primary Address IPv6 Defines the IP address or domain name for your primary RADIUS server when IPv6 protocol is used Default undefined Primary Secret Word Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the primary RADIUS server Default undefined Secondary Address IPv4 Defines the IP address or domain name for your secondary fallback RADIUS server when IPv4 protocol is used Default undefined Secondary Address IPv6 Defines the IP address or domain name for your secondary fallback RADIUS server when IPv6 protocol is used Default undefined Secondary Secret Word Defines the RADIUS Secret Word for the secondary RADIUS server Default undefined Fallb
41. and then return to the command prompt Type S and press Enter the Status Screen will be displayed Check the Status Screen to make certain the unit has been configured with the saved parameters 15 2 Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters 15 5 Restoring Recently Saved Parameters If you make a mistake while configuring the TSM RSM unit and wish to return to the previously saved parameters the Text Interface s Reboot System command T offers the option to reinitialize the TSM RSM using previously backed up parameters This allows you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters even after you have changed parameters and saved them Notes The TSM RSM will automatically backup saved parameters once a day shortly after Midnight This configuration backup file will contain only the most recently saved TSM RSM parameters and will be overwritten by the next night s daily backup When the I command is invoked a submenu will be displayed which offers several Reboot options Option 4 is used to restore the configuration backup file The date shown next to option 4 indicates the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters If the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the configuration error was made and the previously saved configuration has been overwritten by newer incorrect parameters then this function will not be able to restore the previously saved correct parameters
42. apply the LDAP feature you must first define User Names and associated Passwords and group membership via your LDAP server and then access the TSM RSM command mode to configure LDAP settings and define port access rights and command access rights for each group specified at the LDAP server To access the LDAP Parameters menu login to TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator level commands Notes In the Text Interface the LDAP Parameters menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu N for IPv4 parameters or N6 for IPv6 parameters In the Web Browser Interface both IPv4 and IPv6 parameters are defined via a single LDAP Parameters menu which is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration link Portand Plug access rights are not defined at the LDAP server They are defined via the LDAP Group configuration menu on each TSM RSM unit and are specific to that TSM RSM unit alone When LDAP is enabled LDAP authentication will supersede any passwords and access rights that have been defined via the TSM RSM user directory If no LDAP groups are defined on a given TSM RSM unit then access rights will be determined as specified by the default LDAP group The default LDAP group cannot be deleted The LDAP Parameters Menu allows the following parameters to be defined Enable Enables disables LDAP authentication Default Off Primary Host IPv4 Defines the IP address or dom
43. as described in Section 8 3 Inthe Text Interface Port and Plug status is shown on a single screen When the S command is invoked the Port Status Screen will be displayed first press Enter to display the Plug Status Screen In the Web Browser Interface Port and Plug status is shown on two separate screens When Port Status and Plug Status is viewed by an account with Administrator or SuperUser command access all RSM xRy Series serial ports and plugs are listed When Port Status and Plug Status is viewed by an account with User or ViewOnly command access then the screen will list only the serial ports and switched outlets that are allowed by that account e The Port and Plug Status screens also display the current temperature reading for the RSM xRy Series unit The Plug Status screen also shows the status of the Internal Modem Port RSM 2R4 Series units do not include an Internal Modem Port To display the Port and Plug Status Screen via the Text Interface type S and press Enter To display the Port and Plug Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface click on the Port Status link Note that when the S command is invoked the command line can also include arguments that display On Off status for an individual outlet two or more specific outlets or a range of outlets S Displays configuration details and ON Off status for all switched outlets S s Displays On Off status for an individual outlet where s is t
44. at either connected port the No Activity Timeout can also disconnect ports when no command activity is detected at the ports for the user defined timeout period Note The No Activity Timeout also applies to Telnet Direct Connections For more information please refer to Section 5 8 a RS232 Ports To select the timeout period for RS232 Ports access the Port Configuration Menu for the desired port as described in Section 5 8 b Network Port To select the timeout period for the Network Port access the Network Port Configuration Menu as described in Section 5 9 c When the Timeout Feature is enabled the port will automatically disconnect if no data is received during the defined Timeout Period Notes When two connected ports time out both ports will exit command mode after disconnecting e The Timeout value also applies to unconnected ports that are left in command mode When an unconnected port is left in command mode and no additional activity is detected the port will automatically exit command mode when its timeout value elapses Operation 9 1 1 3 The Port Control Screen Web Browser Interface In the Web Browser Interface the Port Control Screen can be used to disconnect TSM RSM serial ports that have been connected using the C command in the Text Interface as described in Section 9 1 1 1 To disconnect ports using the Port Control Screen first access the TSM RSM Command Mode via the Web Browser Interface as de
45. command lines from being broken in two during transmission 3 When the terminal emulation program is ready to receive the file return to the TSM RSM s Save Parameter File menu and press Enter to proceed TSM RSM parameters will be saved on your hard drive in the file specified in Step 2 above 4 The TSM RSM will send a series of command lines which specify currently selected parameters When the download is complete press Enter to return to the command prompt 15 1 Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters 15 1 2 Downloading amp Saving Parameters via Web Browser Interface The Web Browser Interface also includes a download function that can be used to save TSM RSM parameters to an XML format file on your PC or laptop To save parameters via the Web Browser Interface proceed as follows Notes Although TSM RSM parameters can be saved to a file via either the Text Interface or Web Browser Interface saved parameters can only be restored via the Text Interface The Restore Parameters function is not available via the Web Browser Interface This procedure may differ slightly depending on the operating system and browser used In some cases your system may perform a security scan before proceding with the download 1 Access the Web Browser Interface command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands 2 When the Web Browser Interface appears click on the Download Unit Configuration button on th
46. command prompt 6 1 2 Viewing Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles After you have defined one or more Ping No Answer Reboot profiles you can review the parameters selected for each profile using the View Ping No Answer feature In order to view the configuration of an existing Ping No Answer profile you must access command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Ping No Answer menu s View Modify Ping No Answer function 6 1 3 Modifying Ping No Answer Reboot Profiles After you have defined a Ping No Answer profile you can modify the configuration of the profile using the Modify Ping No Answer feature In order to modify the configuration of an existing Ping No Answer profile you must access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Ping No Answer menu s View Modify Ping No Answer function RSM xRy Series units will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected Ping No Answer Reboot Profile Note that this screen functions identically to the Add Ping No Answer Reboot menu as discussed in Section 6 1 1 Note After you have finished defining or editing Ping No Answer Reboot parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Change Ping No Answer button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the RSM xhy Series unit displays the
47. completely exited from command mode and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout period to elapse For example to close a session on a BlackBerry press the Menu button and then choose Close Basic Configuration 5 2 Configuration Menus Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface Command Line Interface provide two separate means for selecting parameters both interfaces allow access to the same set of basic parameters and parameters selected via one interface will also be applied to the other To access the configuration menus proceed as follows Text Interface Refer to the Help Screen H and then enter the appropriate command to access the desired menu When the configuration menu appears key in the number for the parameter you wish to define and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Web Browser Interface Use the links and fly out menus on the left hand of the Screen to access the desired configuration menu To change parameters click in the desired field and key in the new value or select a value from a pull down menu To apply newly selected parameters click on the Change Parameters button at the bottom of the menu or the Set button next to the field The following sections describe options and parameters that can be accessed via each of the configuration menus Please note that essentially the same set of parameters and options are available to both the Web Browser Interface and Text Interfa
48. cursor over the General Parameters link wait for the flyout menu to appear and then click on the System Parameters link The System Parameters Menus are used to define the following User Directory This function is used to view add modify and delete user accounts and passwords As discussed in Section 5 4 and Section 5 5 the User Directory allows you to set the security level for each account as well as determine which plugs and ports each account will be allowed to control Note The User Directory option does not appear in the Web Browser Interface System Parameters menu In the Web Browser Interface User accounts are defined via the User Configuration menu located on the left hand side of the screen Site ID Atext field generally used to note the installation site or name for the TSM RSM unit Up to 64 characters Default undefined Notes e The Site I D will be cleared if the TSM RSM is reset to default settings e When viewed via the Text Interface CLI Site I D messages that are over 30 characters long will be truncated To display the entire Site I D message via the Text Interface type 3 and press Enter Real Time Clock This prompt provides access to the Real Time Clock menu which is used to set the clock and calendar and to enable and configure the NTP Network Time Protocol feature as described in Section 5 3 1 Note The Real Time Clock option does not appear in the Web Browser Interface Sy
49. device at regular intervals if the attached device fails to respond to the Heartbeat message the TSM RSM can then notify you via email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap as described in Section 7 3 Note that the Heartbeat feature is only available when the TSM RSM serial port has been configured for Any to Any mode Default Off Notes The Heartbeat function will only work if the port is configured for Any to Any mode In order to employ the Lost Communication Alarm all target ports must be configured for Any to Any mode In order for the Lost Communication Alarm to function it may be necessary to update the firmware on your remote WTI equipment 5 41 Basic Configuration Network Services Direct Connect Direct Connect allows users to access the TSM RSM and automatically create a connection between the Network Port and a specific serial port by including the appropriate Telnet port number in the connect command e g Port 5 2105 For more information please refer to Section 10 3 As described below the Direct Connect feature offers three options Default Off Off Telnet users will not be able to employ the Direct Connect feature to connect to this port On No Password Telnet users will be able to employ the Direct Connect feature to connect to this port without entering a password On Password Telnet and SSH users will be able to use Direct Connect to connect to this port but will be required t
50. duets 2 5 RSM 16R16 Series Front Panel 00 0 0 cette eee 2 6 RSM 16R16 1 Series Back Panel 0 2 0 esee 2 7 RSM 16R16 2 Series Back Panel 0 2 0 ccc ett eee 2 7 RSM 8R8 Series Front Panel 1 02 0 0 cece teens 2 8 RSM 8R8 1 Back Panel 1 0 0 00 cect tte n 2 10 RSM 8R8 2 Back Panel 1 0 0 00 c ects 2 10 RSM 2R4 Series Front Panel 1 0 0 c cette ene 2 11 RSM 2R4 1F Back Panel 0 00 00 c eect teens 2 12 RSM 2R4 2F Back Panel 0 00 0 cc e n 2 12 Terminal Block Assembly TSM Series DC Units Only 0 0 00 e eae 4 2 Terminal Block Assembly RSM Series DC Units Only 00 00 eee ue 4 2 Boot Priority Example 1 222 ood based os eec REF ead reri deen 5 34 Boot Priority Example 2 acc neo eee dee de eb ea ee ee Gee eG Peas ae ee 5 35 Web Access Parameters Text Interface Only 0 000 eee eee eee 14 1 TSM Series and RSM xRy Series RS232 Port Interface RJ45 000 Apx 3 RSM Series RS232 Port Interface DB9 0 eee eee Apx 3 Straight Cables pi uk nl cakes cate bee ee Peace eed dex S eed Apx 6 Rollover Cables 0 0 0 0 ccc cee mm mn Apx 6 DX9F DTE RJ Snap Adapter Interface llle Apx 7 Connecting DB 9M DTE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units Apx 7 DX25M DTE RJ Snap Adapter Interface lle eese Apx 8 Connecting DB 25F DTE Devices to TSM RSM xRy Series Units Apx 8 D
51. entered in a submenu of the System Parameters menu which is accessed via the Temperature Calibration item Default undefined Log Configuration Configures the Audit Log Alarm Log and Temperature Log For more information on event logging functions please refer to Section 5 3 3 Default Audit Log On without Syslog Alarm Log On without Syslog Temperature Log On Notes The Audit Log will create a record of all power switching and reboot activity at the TSM RSM unit including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding Load Shedding Recovery Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots The Alarm Log will create a record of each instance where an Alarm is triggered or cleared at the TSM RSM unit The Temperature Log will create a record of ambient rack temperature over time e The Temperature Log feature is not available on some TSM RSM models Callback Security Enables and configures the Callback Security Function as described in Section 5 3 4 In order for this feature to function correctly a Callback number must also be defined for each desired user account as described in Section 5 5 Default On Callback without Password Prompt 3 attempts 30 Minute Delay Notes e In the Text Interface Callback Security Parameters are defined via a submenu of the Systems Parameters Menu accessed via the Callback Security item In the Web Browser Interface Callback Security Parameters are defined via the Ca
52. equipment rack reach or exceed user specified trigger levels There are two separate Over Temperature Alarms the Initial Threshold alarm and the Critical Threshold Alarm Typically the Initial Threshold alarm is used to provide notification when temperatures reach a point where you might want to investigate whereas the Critical Threshold alarm is used to provide notification when temperatures approach a level that may harm equipment or inhibit performance The trigger for the Initial Threshold alarm is generally set lower than the Critical Threshold alarm Notes In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 To configure the Over Temperature Alarms access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands and then use the Alarm Configuration menu to select the desired alarm feature Note that both the Initial Threshold menus and Critical Threshold menus offer essentially the same set of parameters but parameters defined for each alarm are separate and u
53. essential devices back On again when the load falls to an acceptable level The Load Shedding Configuration Menus allow you to define the following parameters Notes Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM units or standard RSM units The Load Shedding Configuration Menus for the Over Current Alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters but parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique For example parameters defined for Over Current Initial Alarm Load Shedding will not be applied to Over Current Critical Alarm Load Shedding and vice versa Enable Enables Disables Load Shedding for the corresponding alarm When enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will switch the user specified plugs whenever current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value Default Off Plug State Determines whether the selected plugs plug groups will be switched On or Off when Load Shedding is enabled and current load exceeds the user defined Alarm Set Threshold For example if the Plug State is Off then plugs or plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded Default Off Alarm Configuration Auto Recovery Enables Disables the Auto Recovery feature for the selected branch or line When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will return plugs to their former On Off state after current load falls below the Alarm Clear Threshold value This allows
54. feature is used to switch specific user defined plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value This allows an RSM xRy Series unit to automatically shut Off non essential devices in order to reduce the temperature generated within the rack or automatically switch On devices such as fans or cooling systems in order to dissipate heat from the rack When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled the RSM xRy Series unit can also automatically undo the effects of the Load Shedding feature when the temperature again falls to a user defined non critical level Note 7he Load Shedding configuration menus for both the Initial Threshold Alarm and Critical Threshold Alarm offer essentially the same set of parameters but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique Therefore parameters defined for the Critical Threshold Load Shedding will not be applied to the Initial Threshold Alarm and vice versa The Load Shedding configuration menus for both the Over Temperature Initial Threshold alarm and the Over Temperature Critical Threshold alarm offer the following parameters Enable Enables Disables Load Shedding for the corresponding alarm When enabled the RSM xRy Series unit will switch the user specified plugs whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value Default Off Plug State Determines whether the selected plugs plug groups will be switched On or Off when Load Shedding is e
55. groups specified by the account ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot commands 5 26 Basic Configuration Service Access Determines whether this account will be able to access command mode via Serial Port Telnet SSH or Web and whether or not the account will be allowed to initiate outbound connections For example if Telnet SSH Access is disabled for this account then this account will not be able to access command mode via Telnet or SSH Default Serial Port On Telnet SSH On Web On Outbound Access Off Note The Service Access Parameter is only used to select permitted access services for an individual user account To separately enable disable all SSH or Telnet Access for the TSM RSM unit please refer to Section 5 9 2 Current Power Metering RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Enables Disables this account s access to Current and Power Metering functions Default Off Note Current Power Metering functions cannot be disabled for Administrator level accounts or SuperUser level accounts Callback Phone Number Assigns a number that will be called when this account attempts to access command mode via modem and the Callback Security Function has been enabled as described in Section 5 3 4 Default undefined Notes If the Callback Phone Number is not defined then Callbacks will not be performed for this user If the Callback Phone Number is not defined for a given user and the Cal
56. is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes 7 25 Alarm Configuration Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that the dialtone for the external modem has been lost and then send a second notification when it determines that the dialtone has been restored Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messag
57. level accounts are not allowed to create Third Party remote port connections In order to invoke this command Outbound Telnet SSH and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your account In SuperUser mode configuration menus can be displayed but parameters cannot be changed Not Available on RSM xRy Series units Ping No Answer parameters are defined via the Reboot Options Menu The User Directory can disable access to Current and Power Metering functions for User and View Level accounts Command Reference Guide 17 3 Command Set This Section provides information on all Text Interface commands sorted by functionality 17 3 1 Display Commands S Display Port and Plug Status Screen Displays the Port and Plug Status Screen which lists the current status of the TSM RSM s serial ports and switched outlets For more information please refer to Section 8 3 and Section 8 4 Notes RSM xRy Series Units will also display plug outlet status Power control and power status functions are not available on standard TSM Series or standard RSM series units In Administrator Mode and SuperUser Mode all TSM RSM outlets are displayed In User Mode and ViewOnly Mode the Plug Status Screen will only include the plugs allowed by your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format S Enter SD Display Port Diagnostics Provides detailed information regarding the status of each port When this command i
58. link Note that if you don t define at least one DNS server then IP addresses must be used rather than domain names Note that parameters defined via this menu will be applied to both IPv4 and IPv6 communication The Domain Name Server menu includes a Ping Test feature that allows you to ping the IP addresses for each user defined domain name server in order to check that a valid IP address has been entered Note n order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands 5 58 Basic Configuration 5 9 6 SNMP Access Parameters These menus are used to select access parameters for the SNMP feature In the Text Interface the SNMP Access Parameters menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface the SNMP Access Parameters menu is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration link The Notes After you have configured SNMP Access Parameters you will then be able to manage the TSM RSM s User Directory control power and reboot switching and display unit status via SNMP as described in Section 13 In the Text Interface SNMP Access Parameters are defined via two separate menus that are accessed via either the N command IPv4 or the N6 command IPv6 In the Web Browser interface both IPv4 and IPv6 SNMP Access Parameters are defined via a single menu When defining IPv6 parameters make certain that the IPv6 che
59. message or SNMP Trap when a serial port lockout occurs Notes Note that Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm is only intended to provide notification when the Invalid Access Lockout feature has locked the serial ports To apply the Invalid Access Lockout feature to the Network Port please refer to Section 5 3 2 In order for this alarm to function target ports must be set to Any to Any mode and Invalid Access Lockout parameters for the desired serial port s must first be configured and enabled as described in Section 5 3 2 f desired the TSM RSM can be configured to count Invalid Access attempts at the serial ports and provide notification when the counter exceeds a user defined trigger level without actually locking the serial ports To do this enable the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm as described here but when you configure Invalid Access Lockout parameters as described in Section 5 3 2 set the Lockout Attempts and Lockout Duration as you would normally and then set the Lockout Enable parameter to Off In order for the TSM RSM to provide Email alarm notification communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide Syslog Message notification Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 and Section 1 1 In order for the TSM RSM to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is tri
60. mode Emergency Shutoff RSM xRy Series Units Only Enables disables the Emergency Shutoff Feature In RSM xRy Series the Emergency Shutoff function can be used to immediately shut off all specified power outlets on an RSM xRy Series unit in case of emergency For more information please refer to Section 9 6 Default Off Emergency Shutoff Auto Recovery RSM xRy Series Units Only Enables Disables the Emergency Shutoff Auto Recovery feature When enabled following an Emergency Shutoff all plugs will return to the On Off status that was selected prior to the Emergency Shutoff Default Off Single Plug Boot Delay Enable RSM xRy Series Units Only When enabled the currently defined Boot Sequence Delay value will be applied when a single plug is rebooted and to the final plug in a Plug Group when an entire Plug Group is rebooted This allows you to specify the Off Time that wil be used when a single plug or the last plug in a Plug Group is rebooted For more information on the Boot Sequence Delay parameter please refer to Section 5 7 Default Off 5 18 Basic Configuration TCP Hold Write Options These options can be used to minimize the number of data packets that are sent from the TSM RSM unit In cases where the TSM RSM is receiving a slow flow of data from an attached device the TCP Hold Write Options can be configured to set the size of each packet and define a maximum hold time in order to determine how
61. must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment EMC Safety and R amp TTE Directive Compliance The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following European Community Directives e Council Directive 89 336 EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and e Council Directive 73 23 EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonization of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and Council Directive 1999 5 EC of 9 March on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity Industry Canada EMI Information This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed
62. number to each plug rather than by requiring the user to make certain that devices are always connected to the TSM RSM in a set order Likewise when new devices are added to your equipment rack the Boot Priority Parameter eliminates the need to unplug all existing devices and then rearrange the plugs connected to the TSM RSM and re define plug parameters to ensure that they are switched on in the desired order Notes Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Boot Priority Parameter is not present on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units No two plugs can be assigned the same Boot Priority number When a higher Boot Priority is assigned to any given plug all subsequent plugs will have their boot priorities lowered by a factor of 1 The Boot Priority is also displayed on the Plug Status Screen 5 7 1 1 Example 1 Change Plug 53 to Priority 1 In the Example shown in Figure 5 1 we start out with all Plugs set to their default Boot Priorities with Plug 1 first Plug 2 second and so forth Next the Boot Priority for Plug 3 is changed to Priority 1 This means that Plug 3 will now be switched On first after a reboot and that Plug 1 will now be switched On second Plug 2 will be third etc Note that when the Boot Priority for Plug 3 is set to 1 the Boot Priorities for all plugs that were previously Booted before plug A1 are now lowered by a factor of one BEFORE Assign Pl
63. outlet On at one time and then switch the outlet Off at another time you must define two separate scheduled actions The first action would be used to switch the outlet On and the second action would be used to switch the outlet Off Reboot Options Plug Access Determines which outlet s this Scheduled Reboot action will be applied to In the Text Interface key in the number for the Plug Access option press Enter and then following the instructions in the resulting submenu In the Web Browser Interface outlets are designated by clicking on the plus sign in the Plug Access field and then selecting the desired outlets from the drop down menu Default undefined Plug Group Access Determines which Plug Group s this Scheduled Reboot action will be applied to Note that in the Text Interface Plug Group Access is defined via a separate submenu in the Web Browser Interface Plug Group Access is defined via a drop down menu which may be accessed by clicking on the plus sign in the Plug Group Access field Default undefined 6 2 2 Viewing Scheduled Reboot Actions After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboots you can review the parameters selected for each Reboot using the View Scheduled Reboot feature In order to view the configuration of an existing Scheduled Reboot you must access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Scheduled Reboot menu s View Modify Schedu
64. permits them If disabled Deny then accounts that permit Administrator level commands will not be allowed to access command mode via this port Default Permit Note Administrator Mode cannot be disabled at Serial Port 1 the SetUp port Logoff Character The Logoff Character determines the command s or character s that must be issued at this port in order to disconnect Note that the Logoff Character does not apply to Direct Connections Default X Sequence Disconnect Enables Disables and configures the Resident Disconnect command This offers the option to disable the Sequence Disconnect select a one character format or a three character format Default One Character Inactivity Timeout Enables and selects the Timeout Period for this port If enabled the Serial Port will disconnect when no additional data activity is detected for the duration of the timeout period Default 5 Minutes Notes When the Inactivity Timeout is disabled this allows ports to automatically reconnect after a power interruption When power is restored pairs of ports that were previously connected will be automatically reconnected providing that the Inactivity Timeout is disabled at both ports and the two ports have been connected for at least ten minutes prior to the power interruption The only exception to this rule is Serial Port 1 which will remain disconnected after power is restored in order to provide a free serial port for
65. plugs enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in the range separated by a colon character To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your account enter an asterisk character 1X Optional Suppresses the command confirmation prompt Example Assume that your account allows access to Plug 2 and Plug 3 To switch Plugs 2 and 3 On without displaying the optional command confirmation prompt invoke following command line ON 243 Y Enter 17 10 Command Reference Guide OFF Switch Plug s OFF Switches selected plugs s or Plug Group s Off as described in Section 9 3 2 When the OFF command is used to switch more than one plug Boot Sequence Delay Period will be applied as described in Section 5 7 The OFF command can also be entered as OF Note This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The Off command is only available on RSM xRy Series units When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser Mode it can be applied to all plugs and Plug Groups on the RSM xRy Series unit When invoked in User Mode the command can only be applied to the plugs and or Plug Groups that are enabled for your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format OFF n Y Enter or OF n v Enter Where n The number or name of the plug s or Plug Group s that you intend to Switch Off To apply the command to several plugs enter a plus sign
66. record of all port connection disconnection power switching and reboot activity at the TSM RSM unit including reboots and switching caused by Load Shedding Load Shedding Recovery Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots In addition the Audit Log also includes login logout records for all users and connection disconnection records for the serial ports Each Log record includes a description of the activity that caused the power switching port connection login or reboot the username for the account that initiated the action and the time date that each event occurred Note Power switching functions reboot functions load shedding ping no answer reboots and scheduled reboots are only available on RSM xRY Series units Power related functions are not present on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units Alarm Log Creates a record of all Alarm Activity at the TSM RSM unit Each time an alarm is triggered or cleared the TSM RSM will generate a record that lists the time and date of the alarm the name of the Alarm triggered a description of the Alarm and the time and date that the Alarm was cleared Temperature Log Provides a record of temperature levels over time at the unit Each Log record will include the time and date and the temperature reading Note n RSM 8R8 CM series units the Temperature Log displayed as a part of the Current Metering Log as described in Section 8 6 5 3 3 1 The Audit Log and Alarm Log C
67. resident port e SuperUsers and Users are limited to the ports that are specifically allowed by their accounts Availability Administrator SuperUser Format D Y x x Enter Where X Optional suppresses the Sure prompt x Is the number or name of the port s to be disconnected To disconnect all allowed ports enter an asterisk To disconnect a Telnet session enter the Nn format Network Port Number Example To disconnect Port 2 from Port 3 without the Sure prompt access the Command Mode from a third port with Administrator level command capability and type D Y 2 Enter or p x 3 Enter R Read Buffer Reads from Buffer Mode ports as described in Section 9 1 3 1 Notes e SuperUsers and Users are limited to the ports that are specifically allowed by their accounts When the R command is invoked the counter for the SNMP Traps function will also be reset Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format R n Enter Where n is the number or name of the port buffer to be read 17 8 Command Reference Guide E Erase Buffer Erases data from the buffer for a specified port s Notes Users are limited to the ports that are specifically allowed by their accounts Erased data cannot be recovered Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format E Y x x Enter Where x Is the number or name of the port buffer s to be cleared To erase buffers for all ports enter a
68. serial port by a user with access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands then the letter N can be entered as the command argument to display parameters for the Network Port Note The Port Parameters screens are only available via the Text Interface When the W command is invoked by an Administrator level account which has accessed command mode via the Network Port all Network Port Parameters will be displayed When the W command is invoked by a SuperUser level account which has accessed command mode via the Network Port only the Sequence Disconnect Logoff Character and Accept Break option will be displayed The Status Screens 8 14 The Event Logs The Event Logs can be used to review recent user activity alarm events and temperature trends that have been recorded by the TSM RSM unit In order to view download or erase the event logs you must access command mode using a password that permits Administrator or SuperUser level commands To access the Event Logs via the Text Interface type L press Enter and then select the desired option from the resulting submenu To access the Event Logs via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the Logs link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the flyout menu to appear and then select the desired option Note A though both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface allow you to display or download the Event Logs the Event Logs can only be erased v
69. serial ports proceed as follows 1 Access the TSM RSM command mode via the Text Interface using an account and port that permit access to Administrator level commands Invoke the CP command at the command prompt the Copy Parameters menu will be displayed The following command line options are available a Copy to All Ports Type CP Enter b Copy to a Range of Ports Type CP m n Enter Where m and n are port numbers that specify the desired range For example to copy parameters to ports 3 through 7 type CP 3 7 and press Enter c Copy to Several Ports Type CP m n x Enter Where m n and x are the numbers of the desired ports For example to copy parameters to ports 3 5 and 7 type CP 3 5 7 Enter d Combination To invoke the CP command in a manner where a range of ports is specified along with several ports outside the range type CP m n x z Enter Where m n x and z are port numbers For example to copy parameters to ports 3 and 5 plus ports 7 through 9 type CP 3 5 7 9 Enter Selecting Parameters To select parameters to be copied key in the number for the desired parameter press Enter then follow the instructions in the submenu Clear Menu After defining several parameters if you wish to clear the CP menu and start again type dash and press Enter the menu will be reset Exit Without Copy To exit the Copy Parameters menu without copying selected parameters type x Enter Th
70. standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units To set up a Ping No Answer Reboot you must access command mode using a password that permits Administrator level commands In the Text Interface the Ping No Answer configuration menu is accessed via the Reboot Options menu RB In the Web Browser Interface the Ping No Answer configuration menu is accessed via the Reboot Options link The Ping No Answer configuration menu can be used to Add Modify View or Delete Ping No Answer Reboot functions Note n order for the Ping No Answer Reboot feature to work properly your network and or firewall as well as the device at the target IP address must be configured to allow ping commands 6 1 1 Adding Ping No Answer Reboots Up to 54 Ping No Answer Reboots can be defined The Add Ping No Answer menu is used to define the following parameters for each new Ping No Answer Reboot P Address or Domain Name The IP address or Domain Name for the device that you wish to Ping When the device at this address fails to respond to the Ping command the RSM xRy Series unit will reboot the selected outlets Default undefined Notes In order to use domain names DNS Server parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 5 Inthe Text Interface a submenu will be displayed that allows the user to choose either IPv4 protocol or IPv6 protocol In the Web Browser Interface the Add Ping No Answer Reboot menu includes a me
71. switched device to one of the AC Outlets located on the RSM xRy series unit back panel Note that when power is applied to the RSM xRy series unit the AC Outlets will be switched ON by default Note Power control features are not available on standard TSM Series Units or standard RSM Series units Switched Outlets are only available on RSM xRy series units Connecting Devices to the TSM RSM Serial Ports TSM RSM units feature either RJ45 RS232 connectors or DB9 RS232 format connectors wired in a DCE configuration TSM and RSM xRy series units feature RJ45 connectors and standard RSM Series units feature DB9 format connectors In the default state the serial ports are configured for 9600 bps no parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit For a description of the serial port interface please refer to Appendix B When properly configured the serial ports can be connected to almost any device that includes an RS232 console port In addition the serial ports can also be used to allow local users to configure and control the TSM RSM unit Ports 1 is designated as a Set Up Port and accordingly cannot be reconfigured as a buffer mode or passive mode port in order to ensure the port s availability for local communication with the TSM RSM Notes For cable recomendatations and other information on connecting devices to the TSM RSM unit please refer to Appendix B and Appendix C To connect external modems router switches or other DTE and DCE
72. the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the Current Metering Status link The Status Screens 8 7 The Current History Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Current History Screen displays current voltage and temperature readings as a function of time In the Web Browser Interface the Current History can be displayed as a graph or downloaded in ASCII CSV or XML format In the Text Interface the Current History can be displayed as straight ASCII data or can be downloaded in CSV or XML format To view the Current History Screen access command mode and proceed as follows Note Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM series units or standard RSM series units Text Interface Type L and press Enter to access the Display Logs menu From the Display Logs menu enter the appropriate option number and then press Enter to display the Current Metering Log Menu The Text Interface also offers the option to select the following display parameters Display Data Option Determines whether data will be displayed in Unit format displays total current per input line or Plug format displays current consumption for each individual outlet Display Current Metering Log Displays the Current Metering Log according to the currently selected Display Data Option Download Current Metering Log in CSV Format Downloads the Current Metering Log as determined by the curr
73. the RSM 8R8 CM to undo the effects of Load Shedding after current load has returned to an acceptable level Default Off Plug Access Determines which Plug s will be switched when current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and Load Shedding is triggered For example if plugs A1 A2 and A3 are selected then these plugs will be switched On or Off whenever current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold Default undefined Plug Group Access Determines which Plug Group s will be switched when the Load Shedding feature is triggered For example if you have defined a Plug Group named test which includes Plugs B3 B4 and B5 and then selected the test Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter then all of the plugs in the test Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold Default undefined Note Plug Groups must first be defined as described in Section 5 6 before they will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu s Plug Group Access submenu After setting parameters for a given branch or line you may also define additional parameters for other branches or lines if present To set Load Shedding parameters for other branches or lines return to the Alarm Configuration menu and then repeat the procedure described in Section 7 1 1 7 5 Alarm Configuration 7 2 The Over Temperature Alarms The Over Temperature Alarms can inform you when temperatures inside your
74. the logical Network Port Number 10 2 SSH Encryption In addition to standard Telnet protocol the TSM RSM also supports SSH connections which provide secure encrypted access via network In order to communicate with the TSM RSM using SSH protocol your network node must include an appropriate SSH client Note that when the K Send SSH Key command is invoked the TSM RSM can also provide you with a public SSH key which can be used to streamline connection to the TSM RSM when using SSH protocol Although you can establish an SSH connection to the unit without the public key the public key provides validation for the TSM RSM and once this key is supplied to the SSH client the client will no longer display a warning indicating that the TSM RSM is not a recognized user when the client attempts to establish a connection The K command uses the following format K k Enter Where k is an argument that determines which type of public key will be displayed and the k argument offers the following options 1 SSH1 2 SSH2RSA 3 SSH2 DSA For example to obtain the public SSH key for an SSH2 RSA client type K 2 and then press Enter Note Although the TSM RSM does not support SSH1 the K 1 command will still return a key for SSH1 Teinet amp SSH Functions 10 3 The Direct Connect Feature The Direct Connect feature allows you to initiate a Telnet SSH or Raw Socket session with the TSM RSM and make an immediate conn
75. the password feature is either enabled or disabled as described below a Password Disabled To employ the Break on Raw Disconnect option with the Direct Connect password disabled proceed as follows i Access the Serial Port configuration menu for the desired TSM RSM serial port and then use the Direct Connect option to select the On No Password option After On No Password is selected the menu will return to the Serial Port configuration screen ii Use the Direct Connect option to select the Break on Raw Disconnect parameter After Break on Disconnect is selected the menu will return to the Direct Connect configuration screen Note that at this point the prompt for the Break on Disconnect option will read On Break on Disconnect indicating that both the Direct Connect feature and the Break on Disconnect feature are enabled a Password Enabled To employ the Break on Raw Disconnect option with the Direct Connect password enabled proceed as follows i Access the Serial Port configuration menu for the desired TSM RSM serial port and then use the Direct Connect option to select the On Password option After On Password is selected the menu will return to the Serial Port configuration screen ii Use the Direct Connect option to select the Break on Raw Disconnect parameter After Break on Disconnect is selected the menu will return to the Direct Connect configuration screen Note that at this point
76. the range separated by a colon character To apply the command to all plugs allowed by your account enter an asterisk character Y Optional Suppresses the command confirmation prompt Example Assume that your account allows access to Plug 2 and Plug 3 To initiate a boot cycle at Plugs 2 and 3 without displaying the optional command confirmation prompt invoke either of the following command lines BOOT 2 3 Y Enter or Bo 2 3 y Enter 17 9 Command Reference Guide ON Switch Plug s ON Switches selected plugs s or Plug Group s On as described in Section 9 3 2 Notes This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The On command is only available on RSM xhy Series units When the ON command is used to switch more than one plug the Boot Sequence Delay Periods will be applied as described in Section 5 7 When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser Mode it can be applied to all plugs and Plug Groups on the RSM xhy Series unit When this command is invoked in User Mode it can only be applied to the plugs and or Plug Groups that have been enabled for your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format ON n Y Enter Where n The number or name of the plug s or Plug Group s that you intend to Switch On To apply the command to several plugs enter a plus sign between each plug number To apply the command to a range of
77. to display the Status Screen The STATUS column should now list Ports 3 and 4 as Free Note Although the Web Browser Interface cannot be used to connect TSM RSM serial ports it can be used to disconnect TSM RSM serial ports as described in Section 9 1 1 3 Controlling Outlets RSM xRy Series Models Only You may wish to perform the following tests in order to make certain that the switched outlets are functioning properly Notes Switched outlets can also be controlled via the Web Browser Interface as described in Section 9 2 The Switched Outlets are not present on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series Units a Reboot Outlet At the command prompt type BOOT 1 and press Enter The status indicator for Plug 1 should go Off pause for a moment and then go back On indicating that the boot cycle has been successfully completed b Switch Outlet Off At the command prompt type OFF 1 and then press Enter The status indicator for Plug 1 should go Off indicating that the command has been successfully completed Leave Plug 1 in the Off state and then proceed to the next step c Switch Outlet On At the command prompt type ON 1 and press Enter The status indicator for Plug 1 should then go back On indicating that the command has been successfully completed Exit Command Mode To exit command mode type X and press Enter Getting Started 8 5 The WMU Enterprise Management Solution The WMU
78. user defined trigger levels for current load are exceeded the RSM 8R8 CM can automatically shut off power to non essential devices Load Shedding in order to decrease current load After Load Shedding has taken place the RSM 8R8 CM can also restore power to the non essential devices when current load drops to user defined acceptable levels For more information on Load Shedding please refer to Section 7 1 1 Notes In order for the RSM 8R8 CM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the RSM 8R8 CM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 and Section 11 In order for the RSM 8R8 CM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 and Section 12 To configure the Over Current Alarms access the command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands and then use the Alarm Configuration menu to select the desired alarm feature Note that the configuration menus for both Over Current Alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate Therefore parameters defined for a Critical Alarm will not be applied to an Initial Alarm and vice versa Alarm Configuration
79. will wait for the user defined delay period before switching On the next plug This allows time for the device connected to the first plug to adequately wake up before switching on power to the device connected to the next plug When Reboot cycles and switching actions are initiated the Boot Sequence Delay will be applied as follows Default 0 5 Second m Reboot Cycle Delay During a reboot cycle the RSM xRy Series Unit will first switch all selected plugs Off with a 0 5 second pause between each Off operation and then begin to switch selected plugs back On again pausing for the user defined Boot Sequence Delay before switching On the next plug For example if the Boot Sequence Delay for Plug 3 is ten seconds then the RSM xRy will pause for ten seconds before proceeding to the next plug m On Sequence Delay When two or more plugs are switched On the RSM xRy Series Unit will pause for the user defined Boot Sequence Delay before switching On the next plug 5 32 Basic Configuration Power Up Default Determines how this plug will react when the Default All Plugs command DPL is invoked or after power to the unit has been interrupted and then restored After the default command is invoked or power is restored the TSM RSM will automatically switch each plug On or Off as specified by the Power Up Default Default On Notes If you have accessed command mode using an account that has Administrator or SuperUser lev
80. 15 Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters Once the TSM RSM is properly configured parameters can be downloaded and saved Later if the configuration is accidentally altered the saved parameters can be uploaded to automatically reconfigure the unit without the need to manually assign each parameter Saved parameters can also be uploaded to other identical TSM RSM units allowing rapid set up when several identical units will be configured with the same parameters The Save Parameters procedure can be performed from any terminal emulation program e g HyperTerminal TeraTerm etc that allows downloading Note Configuration parameters can be downloaded and saved via either the Web Browser Interface or Text Interface Saved configuration parameters can only be uploaded to the TSM RSM unit via the Text Interface 15 1 Sending Parameters to a File 15 1 1 Downloading amp Saving Parameters via Text Interface 1 Access the Text Interface command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands 2 When the command prompt appears type U and press Enter The TSM RSM will prompt you to configure your terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII download a Setyour terminal emulation program to receive an ASCII file and the specify a name for a file that will receive the saved parameters e g TSM PAR b Disable the Line Wrap function for your terminal emulation program This will prevent
81. 2 To configure the Lost Voltage Line In Alarm you must access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Lost Voltage Alarm Configuration menu offers the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Note To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify Upon Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Lost Voltage Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes 7 27 Alarm Configuration Notify Upon Clear When enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that one of it s power supplies has been lost or disconnected and then send a second notification when it de
82. 6R16 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2201 through 2216 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2217 TSM 24 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2201 through 2224 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2225 TSM 40 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 2201 through 2240 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 2241 Raw Socket Direct Connection with Password a RSM 2R4 Series Units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3101 and 3102 nternal Modem Port Not Present RSM 8 Series TSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3101 through 3108 e Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3109 RSM 16 Series and RSM 16R16 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3101 through 3116 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3117 TSM 24 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3101 through 3124 e Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3125 TSM 40 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3101 through 3140 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3141 10 5 Teinet amp SSH Functions Raw Socket Direct Connection without Password a RSM 2R4 Series Units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3301 and 3302 Internal Modem Port Not Present b RSM 8 Series TSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3301 through 3308 e Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3309 c RSM 16 Series and RSM 16R16 Series units Serial Ports TC
83. 8 the RSM 16R16 series front panel includes the following components Q oo 00 e Phone Line Port Internal Modem Port When the Internal Modem is present the phone line port is used for connection to your external phone line Network Ports Two Ethernet ports for connection to your primary and secondary 10Base T or 100Base T TCP IP networks Note that the RSM 16R16 features a default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 This allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address The Network Ports also include two LED indicators for Link and Data Activity For more information on port configuration please refer to Section 5 9 Notes The left Network Port is ETHO the right Network Port is ETH1 e When connecting a single network cable to an RSM 16HR16 series unit Dual Ethernet Ports make certain to connect to Port ETHO Serial Ports For connection to console ports on target devices Standard RJ45 connectors configured as DCE ports For more information on connecting devices to the serial ports please refer to Section 4 5 and Appendix B and Appendix C Port Activity Indicators A series of LEDs which will light when a CTS signal is detected and flash during data transmission to indicate activity at the port RESET Button Restarts the RSM 16R16 as described in Section 2 11 DEFAULT Button Switches all plugs Off or sets plugs to default values as described in Section 2 11 O
84. ADIUS server please refer to the documentation provided with your server some servers will require the dictionary file to reside in a specific directory location others will require the dictionary file to be appended to an existing RADIUS dictionary file The WTI RADIUS dictionary file provides the following commands WTI Super Sets the command access level for the user This command provides the following arguments 0 ViewOnly 1 User 2 SuperUser 3 Administrator For example in order to set command access level to SuperUser the command line would be WTI Super 2 5 70 Basic Configuration WTI Port Access Determines which port s the user will be allowed to access This command provides an argument that consists of an 8 character string with one character for each TSM RSM Serial Port The following options are available for each port 0 Off Deny Access 1 On Allow Access For example to allow access to Serial Ports 1 2 3 5 and 8 the command line would be WTI Port Access 11101001 WTI Plug Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines which plug s the user will be allowed to access This command provides an argument that consists of a four character string with one character for each the TSM RSM s switched outlets The following options are available for each switched plug 0 Off Deny Access 1 On Allow Access For example to allow access to Plugs 2 and 4 the command li
85. Adapter Interface RJ 45 DCE DB 25F DTE TSM or Serial Port Serial Port Devices RSM xRy with DB 25F Series Unit Straight DTE Interface RJ 45 Cable DX25M DTE RJ Snap Adapter Figure C 6 Connecting DB 25F DTE Devices to TSM RSM xhy Series Units Apx 8 Appendices C 4 Connecting DB 25F DCE Devices The DX25M DCE RJ Snap Adapter can be used with a Straight RJ 45 cable to attach the following DB 25F DCE devices to RJ 45 serial ports on TSM Series and RSM xRy Series units External Modems with DB 25F DCE Serial Port Other Devices with a DB 25F DCE Console Port When connecting a DB 25F DCE device to an RJ 45 serial port on a TSM Series or RSM xRy Series unit please refer to Figure C 7 and Figure C 8 below RJ 45 DB 25M m Pin No Pin No Signal 1 4 RTS 58 2 20 DTR o5 o 3 2 RXD o o 4 7 GND i o 5 o o o Ping Pini 6 3 TXD o k o 7 8 DCD 99 o 8 5 CTS d Male Figure C 7 DX25M DCE RJ Snap Adapter Interface RJ 45 DCE DB 25F DCE TSM or Serial Port Serial Port External Modem or RSM xRy Series Unit Straight Other Device RJ 45 Cable with DB 25F DCE Interface DX25M DCE RJ Snap Adapter Figure C 8 Connecting DB 25F DCE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units Apx 9 Appendices C 5 Connecting RJ 45 DCE Devices An RJ ROLL Rollover cable can be used to connect the following RJ 45 DCE devices to the RJ 45 serial ports on TSM Series or RSM xRy Series units Cisco Routers with RJ 45 DCE
86. Appendix B Modem If the TSM RSM includes an Internal Modem connect your external phone line to the TSM RSM Phone Line Modem Port Notes When connecting your network cable to a TSM RSM unit that includes two Ethernet ports make certain to connect to Port ETHO Note that an external modem can also be connected to the TSM RSM serial ports as described in Section 4 5 Appendix B and Appendix C For cable recomendatations and other information on connecting devices to the TSM RSM unit please refer to Appendix B and Appendix C Getting Started 3 3 Communicating with the TSM RSM When properly installed and configured the TSM RSM will allow command mode access via Telnet Web Browser SSH client modem or local PC However in order to ensure security both Telnet and Web Browser access are disabled in the default state To enable Telnet and or Web Browser access please refer to Section 5 9 2 Notes Default TSM RSM serial port parameters are set as follows 9600 bps RTS CTS Handshaking 8 Data Bits One Stop Bit No Parity Although these parameters can be easily redefined for this Quick Start procedure it is recommended to configure your communications program to accept the default parameters e The TSM RSM features a default IP Address 192 168 168 168 and a default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 This allows network access to command mode providing that you are contacting the TSM RSM from a node on the same subnet W
87. C Open Circuit Breaker CBO Lost Communication with Unit CL Ping No Answer PNA Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout LO Power Cycle Cold Boot CB Buffer Threshold BT Plug Current PC Lost Voltage Line In VL No Dialtone ND Emergency Shutoff ES Availability Administrator Format AS alarm Enter Where alarm is an optional argument which can be used to display the status of an individual alarm as shown in the table above J Display Site ID Unit Information Displays the user defined Site I D message If the optional asterisk argument is included in the command line the command can also display the model number serial number software version and other information for the TSM RSM unit Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format J Enter Where is an optional argument which can be included in the command line to display the exact model number and software version of the TSM RSM unit 17 6 Command Reference Guide 17 3 2 Control Commands X Exit Command Mode Exits command mode When issued at the Network Port also ends the Telnet session Note f the X command is invoked from within a configuration menu recently defined parameters may not be saved In order to make certain that parameters are saved always press the Esc key to exit from all configuration menus and then wait until Saving Configuration message has been displayed and the cursor has returned to the command prompt bef
88. Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that an Invalid Access Lockout has occurred and then send a second notification when it determines that the ports have been unlocked Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Invalid Access Lockout Alarm Configuration 7 6 The Power Cycle Alarm The Power Cycle Alarm can provide notification when all input power to the TSM RSM unit is lost and then restored When the power supply is lost and then restored the TSM RSM can provide notification via Email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap Notes The Power Cycle alarm can provide notification when all input power to the TSM RSM unit is lost and then restored This alarm will not function
89. Console Port Sun Routers with RJ 45 DCE Console Port Other Devices with RJ 45 DCE Console Port When connecting an RJ 45 DCE device to an RJ 45 serial port on TSM Series or RSM xRy Series units please refer to Figure C 9 below RJ 45 DCE RJ 45 DCE F Cisco Router TSM or Serial Port Serial Port Sun Router RSM xRy or other Series Unit Rollover Device RJ 45 Cable with RJ 45 DCE Interface Figure C 9 Connecting RJ 45 DCE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units C 6 DX9F NULL RJ Snap Adapter The DX9F NULL RJ Snap Adapter is used for straight through cable connections Pins 2 through 8 RJ 45 DB 9F Pin No Pin No Signal 1 7 RTS 2 4 DTR 3 3 TXD 4 5 GND 5 Pin8 Pin 1 6 RXD Female 7 6 DSR 8 8 CTS Figure C 10 DX9F NULL RJ Snap Adapter Interface Apx 10 Appendix D Customer Service Customer Service hours are from 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM PST Monday through Friday When calling please be prepared to give the name and make of the unit its serial number and a description of its symptoms If the unit should need to be returned for factory repair it must be accompanied by a Return Authorization number from Customer Service WTI Customer Service 5 Sterling Irvine California 92618 Local Phone 949 586 9950 Toll Free Service Line 1 888 280 7227 Service Fax 949 583 9514 Email service wti com Apx 11 Appendices Trademark and Copyright Information WTI and Western Telematic are trademar
90. DAP Groups you must access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands 5 65 Basic Configuration 5 9 9 TACACS Parameters The TACACS Configuration Menus offer the following options Enable Enables disables the TACACS feature at the Network Port Default Off Primary Address The IP address or domain name for your primary TACACS server Default undefined Secondary Address The IP address or domain name for your secondary fallback TACACS server Default undefined Secret Word The shared TACACS Secret Word for both TACACS servers Default undefined Fallback Timer Determines how long the unit will attempt to contact the primary TACACS Server before falling back to the secondary server Default 15 Seconds Fallback Local Determines whether or not the TSM RSM will fallback to its own username directory when an authentication attempt fails When enabled the unit will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the TACACS Server If this fails the unit will then attempt to authenticate the password by checking its own internal username directory This parameter offers three options Off Fallback Local is disabled Default On All Failures Fallback Local is enabled and the unit will fallback to it s own internal user directory when it cannot contact the TACACS Server or when a password or username does not match the TACACS Server On Tra
91. Default Off Ping Test Allows you to ping IP addresses or domain names that have been defined via the LDAP Parameters menus in order to check that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered Notes In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping any user defined IP address in order to make certain that the IP address is responding 5 9 8 1 Adding LDAP Groups Once you have defined several users and passwords via your LDAP server and assigned those users to LDAP Groups you must then grant command and port access rights to each LDAP Group at each individual TSM RSM unit To add LDAP groups to your TSM RSM unit log in to the command mode using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands The Add LDAP Group menu allows the following parameters to be defined Group Name Note that this name must match the LDAP Group names that you have assigned to users at your LDAP server Default undefined Access Level Sets the command access level to either Administrator SuperUser User or ViewOnly For more information please refer to Section 5 4 1 Default User Port Access This item is used to select the serial ports that members of this LDAP group will be allowed to conne
92. Enter X Outbound Telnet TELNET ip port raw Enter xo xo xo Outbound SSH SSH ip 1 username Enter xo xo xe Broadcast Mode broadcast port list Enter X X Configuration System Parameters F Enter X o Serial Port Parameters P Enter X 9 Plug Parameters PL lt n gt Enter X o Plug Group Parameters 9 G Enter X o Network Configuration IPv4 N Enter X o Network Configuration IPv6 N6 Enter X 9 Ping No Answer Configuration PNA Enter X 7 Reboot Options 9 RB Enter X o Alarm Configuration AC Enter X o Reboot System 1i Enter X X Upgrade Firmware UF Enter X Copy Port Parameters CP z Enter X Test Network Configuration TEST Enter X O00000 60 O86 Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units 17 2 The Y argument can be included to suppress the command confirmation prompt Current and Power Metering capabilities are only available on RSM 8R8 CM Series units In Administrator and SuperUser mode all ports plugs plug groups are displayed In User and ViewOnly mode the screen will only display ports plugs plug groups allowed by the account Standard TSM and RSM units do not include switched plugs User and ViewOnly level accounts are only allowed to view parameters for the port that was used to access command mode User level accounts are only allowed to create a connection to Serial Ports permitted by the account User
93. JavaScript enabled Web Browser key the TSM RSM s default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 into the web browser s address bar and press Enter 2 Username Password Prompt A message box will prompt you to enter your username and password The default username is super all lower case no quotes and the default password is also super Note f a Login Banner has been defined as described in Section 5 3 then a banner page will appear before the command prompt is displayed The Login Banner can be used to display legal warnings or other information Basic Configuration 5 1 3 Access Via PDA In addition to the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface the TSM RSM command mode can also be accessed by PDA devices Note however that due to nature of most PDAs only a limited selection of TSM RSM operating and status display functions are available to users who communicate with the unit via PDA When the TSM RSM is operated via a PDA only the following functions are available Product Status Screen Unit Info Section 8 1 Port Status Screen Section 8 3 Port and Plug Status Screen Section 8 4 RSM xRy Series Only Plug Group Status Screen Section 8 5 RSM xRy Series Only Plug Control Screen Section 9 2 1 RSM xRy Series Only Plug Group Control Screen Section 9 2 2 RSM xRy Series Only Notes The Plug Status Screen Plug Group Status Screen Plug Control Screen and Plug Group Control Screen are only available on
94. M RSM unit 13 7 Operation via SNMP 13 6 4 Alarm Status The status of the TSM RSM unit s alarm functions can be retrieved and displayed using the following commands Notes When an alarm status command returns a zero 0 this indicates that the alarm is inactive When an alarm status command returns a one 1 this indicates that the alarm is active triggered alarmTables alarmOverCurrentInitial RSM xRy Series Units Only Displays the status of the Over Current Initial Line Alarm alarmTables alarmOverCurrentCritical RSM 8R8 CM Series Only Displays the status of the Over Current Critical Line Alarm e alarmTables alarmOverTemperatureInitial Displays the status of the Over Temperature Initial Alarm alarmTables alarmOverTemperatureCritical Displays the status of the Over Temperature Critical Alarm alarmTables alarmCommLoss Displays the status of the Lost Communication Alarm alarmTables alarmPingNoAnswer Displays the status of the Ping No Answer Alarm alarmTables alarmInvalidAccessLockout Displays the status of the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm alarmTables alarmPowerCycle Displays the status of the Power Cycle Alarm alarmTables alarmBufferThreshold Displays the status of the Buffer Threshold Alarm e alarmTables alarmPlugCurrent RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Displays the status of the Plug Current Alarm alarmTables alarmLostO
95. Modifying User Accounts The Modify User Directory function allows you to edit existing user accounts in order to change parameters port and plug access rights or Administrator Command capability Note that the Modify User function is only available when you have entered command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands Once you have accessed the Modify Users menu use the menu options to redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add User menu as discussed in Section 5 5 2 Note After you have finished changing parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Modify User button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message 5 5 4 Deleting User Accounts This function is used to delete individual user accounts Note that the Delete User function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands Notes Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored The TSM RSM allows you to delete the default super account which is included to permit initial access to command mode Before deleting the super account make certain to create another account that permits Administrator Access If you do not retain at least one account with Administrator Access you will not be able to invoke Adminis
96. N Indicator Lights when AC Power is applied to the unit RDY Indicator Ready Flashes to indicate the unit is ready to receive commands DCD Indicator The Data Carrier Detect indicator Plug Activity Indicators A series of sixteen LED indicators which light when power is applied to the corresponding switched outlet Note Providing that power is still present at the secondary power inlet for a given branch the Plug Activity indicators for that branch will blink on and off when the primary power source for that branch is lost or disconnected Unit Description NM s 3 BUJ IMARY mm mm SECONDARY mm AS AS JeJIe e eee PRIMARY SECONDARY Figure 2 10 RSM 16R16 2 Series Back Panel 2 6 RSM 16R16 Series Back Panel As shown in Figures 2 9 and 2 10 the RSM 16R16 series back panel includes the following components Branch A Power Inlets Two IEC 320 C20 inlets that supply power to Branch A Each branch includes two inlets to allow connection to both a primary power supply and secondary fallback power supply to Branch A Also includes cable keepers not shown Branch B Power Inlets Two IEC 320 C20 inlets that supply power to Branch B Each branch includes two inlets to allow connection to both a primary power supply and secondary fallback power supply to Branch B Also includes cable keepers not shown Branch A Switched Outlets Eight switched AC outlets that ar
97. NMP Manager SNMP Manager 2 Default undefined Trap Community Default Public Trap Version The assigned security level for SNMP traps Default V1 V3 Trap Engine ID The V3 SNMP agent s unique identifier Default undefined Ping Test Allows you to ping the IP addresses or domain names defined via the SNMP Manager 1 and SNMP Manager 2 prompts in order to check that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered Notes In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping the currently defined SNMP Managers in order to make certain that the IP addresses are responding 5 61 Basic Configuration 5 9 8 LDAP Parameters The TSM RSM supports LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol which allows authentication via the Active Directory network Directory Service When LDAP is enabled command access rights can be granted to new users without the need to define individual new accounts at each TSM RSM unit and existing users can also be removed without the need to delete the account from each TSM RSM unit This also allows administrators to assign users to LDAP groups and then specify which plugs the members of each group will be allowed to control at each TSM RSM unit In order to
98. Notes When switching and reboot operations are initiated Boot Sequence Delay times will be applied as described in Section 5 7 If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the process of being switched or rebooted then the new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands If the Status column in the Plug Control Screen includes an asterisk this means that the outlet is busy completing a previously invoked command When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits Administrator or SuperUser level commands all switched outlets will be shown When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits User or ViewOnly command access the screen will only include the switched outlets that are specifically allowed by the account Operation 9 2 2 The Plug Group Control Screen Web Browser Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and RSM Series units do not support power control functions The Plug Group Control Screen is used to send switching and reboot commands to the user defined Plug Groups As described in Section 5 6 Plug Groups allow you to specify a group of outlets that are dedicated to a similar purpose or client and then direct switching commands to the group rather than switching one plug at a time To apply power switching commands to P
99. P Enter 17 17 Command Reference Guide TEST Test Network Parameters Displays a menu which is used to test configuration of the Syslog and SNMP Trap functions and can also be used to ping a user selected IP address Notes In order for a ping test to function properly your network and or firewall and the target device must be configured to allow ping commands In order for the ping command to function with domain names Domain Name Server parameters must be defined as described in Section 5 9 5 The Test Menu s Ping command is not effected by the status of the Network Parameters Menu s Ping Access function Availability Administrator Format TEST Enter 17 18 Appendix A Specifications A 1 Standard TSM Series Units and Standard RSM Series Units Network Interface 10 100Base T Ethernet RJ45 multi session Telnet Optional Secondary 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Available on Some Models RS232 Port Interface Connectors TSM 8 Series Models Eight 8 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout TSM 24 Series Models Twenty Four 24 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout e TSM 40 Series Models Forty 40 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout RSM 8 Series Models Eight 8 DB9 connectors DTE pinout RSM 16 Series Models Sixteen 16 DB9 connectors DTE pinout Coding 7 8 bits Even Odd No Parity 1 2 Stop Bits Flow Control XON XOFF RTS CTS Both or None Data Rate 300 to 115 2K bps all standard rates Inactivity Timeo
100. P address is again responding to the Ping command Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages that are generated by this alarm Default Alarm Ping No Answer Alarm Configuration 7 5 The Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm The Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm can provide notification when the TSM RSM has locked the serial ports due to repeated invalid attempts to access command mode via serial port Normally the Invalid Access Lockout feature discussed in Section 5 3 2 can lock the serial ports whenever the unit detects that the user defined threshold for invalid access attempts has been exceeded When the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm is properly configured and enabled the unit can also provide notification via Email SYSLOG
101. P port numbers 3301 through 3316 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3317 d TSM 24 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3301 through 3324 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3325 e TSM 40 Series units Serial Ports TCP port numbers 3301 through 3340 Internal Modem Port TCP port number 3341 Note n order to create a Raw Socket Direct Connection the Raw Socket Access parameter for the Network Port must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 When establishing a Direct Connection the correct TCP port number must be used If conditions are acceptable e g Target Port must be free and properly configured an immediate connection will be made with one possible exception password entry may first be required depending on configuration settings Note When a Direct Connect attempt fails because the Port is busy the call is rejected at the TCP level Connection Example 1 Assume that Port 8 is configured as described in Section 10 3 2 If the TSM RSM s IP address is 1 2 3 4 and you wish to establish a standard Telnet protocol connection with port 8 TCP Port Number 2108 then on a UNIX system the connect command would be invoked as follows telnet 1 2 3 4 2108 Enter The TSM RSM will first send the site ID Port Number Port Name and Telnet Port number and then once a connection is established the Connected message will be sent 10 6 Teinet amp SSH Functions 10 3 4 Terminatin
102. Ping Syslog Servers Ping Test Pings the IP addresses which have been defined for the SYSLOG Severs in order to check for a response Notes The Syslog Address submenu in the Text Interface and the Network Parameters submenu in the Web Browser Interface both include a Ping Test function that can be used to ping the user selected Syslog IP Addresses in order to verify that valid IP addresses have been entered In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping the currently defined Syslog Addresses in order to make certain that the IP addresses are responding 5 55 Basic Configuration 5 9 2 1 Modem Pooling The Modem Hunt Telnet and Modem Hunt Raw parameters allow the TSM RSM to support modem pooling in conjunction with third party Serial Port Redirector software This allows you to connect external modems to several TSM RSM serial ports and then use the TSM RSM to automatically find a free modem when you need to create an outbound connection The Modem Hunt Telnet and Modem Hunt Raw options function as follows Modem Hunt Telnet Offers three different configuration options Off Disabled On No Password and On Password Each of the On options selects a default port number for modem pooling
103. RED NR EI Up TREE EA 12 1 Operation via SNMP ssseeeeeeeeeeeee nnn nnn 13 1 18 1 TSM RSM SNMP Agent 00 0 hn 13 1 18 2 SNMPv3 Authentication and Encryption slssseseeeee esee 13 1 13 3 Configuration via SNMP ssssesseee e en 13 2 13 8 1 Viewing USerS 22 dome REIR I RR RUE EVRPT ERE E T eer 13 3 13 3 2 Adding USers cirea uo rs Ret fouet EE OT ah dtu a 13 3 13 3 3 Modifying Users ek Rt heo n tte SR DR e Eod ae 13 3 13 3 4 Deleting Users suo c ee eat RE Y RE Pa RACE PUR Pr 13 3 13 4 Plug Control via SNMP issesssseseeee e mr 13 4 13 4 1 Controlling Plugs 2 2ssiesee lo ell as gh membr y 13 4 13 4 2 Controlling Plug Groups ssssssesleee n 13 5 13 5 Configuring Serial Ports llis ene 13 6 13 6 Viewing Unit Status via SNMP 0 0 0 ene 13 7 13 6 1 System Status Ethernet Port Mac Addresses 00000e0ee 13 7 13 6 2 Plug Status aea n PREIS REPRE aye eee quor Rid UR pecus 13 7 13 6 3 Unit Temperature Status isses ees 13 7 13 6 4 Alarm Status sec EE RR RI ER bea ee tedg whee RPG 13 8 13 7 Sending Traps via SNMP ssssssesee eene 13 9 Setting Up SSL Encryption 2 22 2200 cece eee eee anre 14 1 14 1 Creating a Self Signed Certificate ee 14 2 14 2 Creating a Signed Certificate llle eese 14 3 14 3 Downloading the Server Private Key 0 0 00 c cece eects 14 4 14 4 TES MOGs eee gba
104. RSM units only Current Metering Log RSM 8R8 CM Series units only and Power Metering Log RSM 8R8 CM Series units only For more information on Log Functions please refer to Section 5 3 3 Availability Administrator SuperUser Format L Enter 17 5 Command Reference Guide M Current Metering RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Displays the Current Metering Screen which lists Current Power Voltage and Temperature readings as well as settings for the Current and Temperature alarms Notes Current Metering functions are not available on Standard TSM series units and Standard RSM series units f desired the User Directory can disable access to Current and Power Metering functions for User and View Only level accounts Availability Administrator SuperUser User View Only Format M Enter AS Alarm Status Screen Lists all available user defined alarms and indicates whether or not each alarm has been triggered as described in Section 8 12 The resulting screen will display Yes or 1 for alarms that have been triggered or No or 0 for alarms that have not been triggered If desired the AS command line can also include an optional alarm argument that will cause the unit to display the status of one individual alarm as shown in the table below Alarm Name Alarm Argument Over Current Initial OCI Over Current Critical OCC Over Temperature Initial OTI Over Temperature Critical OT
105. SM RSM will wait to send additional ping commands after the Ping No Answer Alarm has been triggered Default 15 Minutes Consecutive Failures Determines how many consecutive failures of the Ping command must be detected in order to trigger the Ping No Answer Alarm For example if this value is set to 3 then after three consecutive Ping failures the Ping No Answer Alarm will be triggered Default 5 Alarm Configuration PNA Action Determines how the Ping No Answer Alarm will react when this IP address fails to respond to a ping If Continuous Alarm is selected the TSM RSM will continue to generate new alarms until the Ping No Answer Alarm is cleared If Single Alarm is generated the TSM RSM will generate a single alarm and will not generate additional alarms until a successful ping operation is completed and then another Ping No Answer condition is detected Default Continuous Alarm Ping Test Sends a test Ping command to this IP Address Notes In order for the Ping Test feature to work properly your network and or firewall as well as the device at the target IP address must be configured to allow ping commands After defining or editing Ping No Answer IP Addresses make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add Ping No Answer button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the Saving Configuration message is
106. Screens 0 0 ett eee ee 8 10 844 The EventLogs ole bere Rr RR RUNG E IE x ure E 8 11 8 14 1 The AU LOG nz edb s bU Au Red he ee Stes 8 11 8 14 2 The Alarm Logo oes eee poe em ee ene ecd re a eo ee ot 8 11 8 14 3 The Temperature Log 2 22 20 eee 8 11 9 Operation uniuersi pe euius i esses quien mated mre INR YR aag ee 9 1 9 1 Connecting and Disconnecting Serial Ports Text Interface 005 9 1 9 1 1 Any to Any Mode eelssssu s bd hber rb e dre edd 9 1 9 1 1 1 Connecting Ports Text Interface eese esses 9 2 9 1 1 2 Disconnecting Ports Text Interface 0000 9 4 9 1 1 3 The Port Control Screen Web Browser Interface 9 6 9 1 1 4 Defining Hunt Groups Text Interface 1 0 0 0 0 2c eee eee 9 7 9 1 2 Passive MOd eee aay Wa cad bie She Pe da Awad 9 8 93 9 Buffer Mode scene Sedee BUPA ee eR ha weed GAN eee E 9 8 9 1 3 1 Reading Data from Buffer Mode Ports Text Interface 9 8 9 1 3 2 Port Buffers iis ia Cede ae ed en age eee eed eee eR ee 9 10 9 1 4 Modem Mode sco ee eee bade RE TERRIER bee bees 9 11 9 1 5 Modem PPP Mode i Rn ee esa e kbp ee cane RE ERE ey 9 11 9 2 Controlling Power Web Browser Interface sisse eee 9 12 9 2 1 The Plug Control Screen Web Browser Interface lilius 9 12 9 2 2 The Plug Group Control Screen Web Browser Interface 9 13 VI 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
107. Serial Port RS232 sc ae kas GERI DUEB Hae ee eek C RU TRA E Apx 3 B 2 TSM and RSM xRy Series RJ45 Serial Ports 2 2 eee eee Apx 4 B 3 RSM Series DB9M Serial Ports aaau eee Apx 5 C Connecting Devices to RJ45 Serial Ports 0 ccc ec eee Apx 6 C 1 Straight RJ 45 Cables and Rollover RJ 45 Cables 0 00 e eee eee Apx 6 C 2 Connecting DB 9M DTE Devices sssssesessee eh Apx 7 C 3 Connecting DB 25F DTE Devices sssssseeeeee eh Apx 8 C 4 Connecting DB 25F DCE Devices 00 c eee Apx 9 C 5 Connecting RJ 45 DCE Devices 0 0 cece teens Apx 10 C 6 DX9F NULL RJ Snap Adapter 0 Apx 10 D Customer Service scm Be ee x Exe a eae AE E EA a Mera erry ec Apx 11 viii Table of Contents List of Figures 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 14 1 B 1 B 2 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 TSM Series Front Panel Model TSM 24 Shown 0 cece eee eee eee 2 1 TSM 8 Series Units Back Panel 0 00 0 cece cee 2 2 TSM 24 Series Units Back Panel 00 0 c eee 2 2 TSM 40 Series Units Back Panel 00 0 c eect eens 2 2 RSM Series Front Panel Model RSM 8 Shown 00 0c cece eee eee 2 4 RSM 8 Back Panel 0 0 0 0 cece hn 2 5 RSM 16 Back Panel exa nri ep ERREUR a a REY doer t peto Seg P
108. Table plugStatus Current state of the plug 0 Plug is OFF 1 Plug is ON e plugTable plugAction Action to be taken on plug 1 Mark to turn ON does not execute 2 Mark to turn OFF does not execute 3 Mark to BOOT does not execute 4 Mark to DEFAULT does not execute 5 Mark to turn ON and execute plug actions 6 Mark to turn OFF and execute plug actions 7 Mark to BOOT and execute plug actions 8 Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug actions Set plugTable plugAction to desired action as specified by values 1 4 above for each plug index the action is to be applied to For the last plug you wish to set before executing the commands use values 5 8 instead which will invoke the requested commands all at once 13 4 Operation via SNMP 13 4 2 Controlling Plug Groups Note Power Control features are not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM series units The power control functions described here are only available on RSM xRy Series units ON OFF BOOT and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plug groups via SNMP Plug groups are arranged in a table of 54 rows one row for each plug group in the system Plug Group parameters are described below plugGroupTable plugGroupName String indicating the plug groups name e plugGroupTable plugGroupAction Action to be taken on plug group 1 Mark to turn ON does not execute 2 Mark to turn OFF does not execute 3 Mark to BOOT does not exe
109. The Current Alarm Configuration menus offer the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all other alarms For example if the Over Current Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then the triggers for all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Alarm Set Threshold The trigger level for this alarm When current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold the RSM 8R8 CM can send an alarm and or begin load shedding if enabled Note that the Alarm Set Threshold is entered as a percentage of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm and Over Current Line Alarm if present Defaults Initial 8096 Critical 90 Alarm Clear Threshold Determines how low the current load must drop in order for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for load shedding recovery if enabled to occur The Alarm Clear Threshold is entered as a percentage of maximum capacity and is applied to both Over Current Branch Alarm and Over Current L
110. Two Power Supply Cables Note that some TSM RSM series units and RSM xRy series units feature two separate power inlets and a separate power supply cable for each power inlet In addition RSM 16R16 series units feature four separate power inlets and a separate power supply cable for each power inlet Make certain to disconnect all power supply cables from their power source before attempting to service or remove the unit Modem Cables CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger e g 24 AWG UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication Line Cord Il Agency Approvals FCC Part 15 Regulation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device
111. WTI Part No 14023 Rev O TSM Series Serial Console Servers Remote Site Managers RSM xRy Series Remote Site Managers with Power Control Products Covered TSM Series RSM Series RSM xRy Series TSM 40 Models RSM 16 Models RSM 16R16 Models TSM 24 Models RSM 8 Models RSM 8R8 Models TSM 8 Models RSM 2R4 Models WE Power amp Console Solutions wti com A Warnings and Cautions installation Instructions Secure Racking If Secure Racked units are installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly they may require further evaluation by Certification Agencies The following items must be considered 1 The ambient within the rack may be greater than room ambient Installation should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation is not compromised The maximum temperature for the equipment in this environment is 45 C Consideration should be given to the maximum rated ambient 2 Installation should be such that a hazardous stability condition is not achieved due to uneven loading 1 Check nameplate ratings to assure there is no overloading of supply circuits that could have an effect on overcurrent protection and supply wiring 2 When installing 48 VDC rated equipment it must be installed only per the following conditions A Connect the equipment to a 48 VDC supply source that is electrically isolated from the alternating current source The 48 VDC source is to be connected to a 48 VDC SELV s
112. Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the General Parameters link wait for the flyout menu to appear and then Click on the Callback Security link In both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface the Callback Security Menu offers the following options Callback Enable This prompt offers five different configuration options for the Callback Security feature Default On Callback Without Password Prompt Off All Callback Security is disabled On Callback Without Password Prompt Callbacks will be performed for user accounts that include a Callback Number and the login prompt will not be displayed when the user s modem answers If the account does not include a Callback Number that user will be granted immediate access and a Callback will not be performed On Callback With Password Prompt Callbacks will be performed for user accounts that include a Callback Number and the login prompt will be displayed when the user s modem answers accounts that include a Callback Number will be required to re enter their username password when their modem answers If the account does not include a Callback Number then that user will be granted immediate access and a Callback will not be performed On Callback ONLY Without Password Prompt Callbacks will be performed for user accounts that include a Callback Number and the username password prompt will not be displayed when the user s modem answers Accounts that
113. Web protection the lockout trigger is a function of the Web Hit Count parameter and the Web Lockout Duration Parameter Lockout Enable Enables Disables Invalid Access Lockout protection for web connections Default Off e Web Hit Count The number of invalid attempts that must occur during the length of time specified by the Web Lockout Duration period in order to trigger the Invalid Access Lockout feature for Web access For example if the Web Hit Count parameter is set to 10 and the Web Lockout Duration parameter is set to 30 minutes then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for 30 minutes when over 10 invalid access attempts occur during any 30 minute long period Default 20 Web Lockout Duration This option selects both the length of time that a Web Lockout will remain in effect and also the time period over which invalid access attempts will be counted When a Web Lockout occurs the offending MAC address will be prevented from establishing a Web connection to the TSM RSM for the defined Telnet Lockout Duration period Default 2 Seconds Basic Configuration 5 3 3 Log Configuration This feature allows you to create records of command activity alarm actions and temperature readings for the TSM RSM unit The Log features are enabled and configured via the System Parameters Menus The TSM RSM features three different event logs the Audit Log the Alarm Log and the Temperature Log Audit Log Creates a
114. X25M DCE RJ Snap Adapter Interface u nan eects Apx 9 Connecting DB 25F DCE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units Apx 9 Connecting RJ 45 DCE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units Apx 10 DX9F NULL RJ Snap Adapter Interface 0 cece ee Apx 10 IX 1 Introduction This User s Guide covers three WTI product lines TSM Series Serial Console Servers RSM Series Remote Site Managers and RSM xRy Series Remote Site Managers with Power Control All four of these product lines are designed to simplify the process of remotely managing vital network elements located at distant network equipment sites and off site facilities The TSM and RSM lines both provide remote access to console port command functions on faraway network elements RSM xRy Series units provide remote access to console ports on distant network equipment and also include the ability to remotely control power switching and reboot functions at the remote network equipment site Security and Co Location Features Secure Shell SSHv2 encryption and address specific IP security masks help to prevent unauthorized access to command and configuration functions The TSM RSM provides four different levels of security for user accounts Administrator SuperUser User and ViewOnly The Administrator level provides complete access to all serial port and switched plug functions status displays and configuration menus The SuperUser level allows c
115. a different selection of ports Note also that several accounts can be allowed access to the same port When accounts are created the Port Access parameter in the Add User or Modify User menu can be used to grant or deny access to each serial port by that account In addition each command access level is also used to restricts the serial ports that the account will be allowed to access Administrator Accounts with Administrator access are always allowed to control all Serial Ports Port access cannot be disabled for Administrator level accounts SuperUser SuperUser accounts allow access to all Serial Ports Port access cannot be disabled for SuperUser level accounts User Accounts with User level access are only allowed to create connections with the Serial Ports that have been specifically permitted via the Port Access parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus ViewOnly Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to create connections with Serial Ports ViewOnly accounts can display the status of Serial Ports but are limited to the ports specified by the account 5 23 Basic Configuration 5 4 3 Granting Plug Access Each account can be granted access to a different selection of switched power outlets plugs and plug groups When accounts are created the Plug Access parameter and the Plug Group Access parameter in the Add User menu or Modify User menu can be used to grant or deny access to each plug or plug gro
116. access the unit via the Text Interface When a new IP Adaress is selected or the status of the DHCP feature is changed the unit will disconnect and reconfigure itself with the new values when you exit the Network Parameters Menu When configuring the unit via Web or Telnet make certain your DHCP server is set up to assign a known fixed IP address in order to simplify reconnection to the unit after the new address has been assigned The Network Parameters menu is only available when you have logged into command mode using an account and port that permit Administrator level commands Administrator Mode enabled TSM RSM Units with a Single Ethernet Port Both IPv4 and IPv6 parameters can be defined for the Ethernet port and the unit will automatically use the appropriate protocol to match connections established via the Ethernet port Note that both the IPv4 configuration menu and the IPv6 configuration menu offer essentially the same parameters Text Interface To define network parameters for the IPv4 protocol type N and press Enter To define network parameters for the IPv6 protocol type N6 and press Enter Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the fly out menu to appear and then click on the link to display the desired menu Note that some submenus offer the option to define IPv4 or IPv6 parameters and that IPv4 and IPv6 menus includ
117. ack Timer Determines how long the TSM RSM will continue to attempt to contact the primary RADIUS Server before falling back to the secondary RADIUS Server Default 3 Seconds Fallback Local Determines whether or not the TSM RSM will fallback to its own password username directory when an authentication attempt fails When enabled the TSM RSM will first attempt to authenticate the password by checking the RADIUS Server if this fails the TSM RSM will then attempt to authenticate the password by checking its own internal username directory This parameter offers three options Off Fallback Local is disabled Default On All Failures Fallback Local is enabled and the unit will fallback to it s own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server or when a password or username does not match the Radius Server On Transport Failure Fallback Local is enabled but the unit will only fallback to it s own internal user directory when it cannot contact the Radius Server Retries Determines how many times the TSM RSM will attempt to contact the RADIUS server Note that the retries parameter applies to both the Primary RADIUS Server and the Secondary RADIUS Server Default 3 Authentication Port The Authentication Port number for the RADIUS function Default 1812 5 69 Basic Configuration Accounting Port The Accounting Port number for the RADIUS function Default 1813 Debug Text Inter
118. ain name for the primary LDAP server when IPv4 protocol is used to communicate with the TSM RSM unit Default undefined Primary Host IPv6 Defines the IP address or domain name for the primary LDAP server when IPv6 protocol is used to communicate with the TSM RSM unit Default undefined Secondary Host IPv4 Defines the IP address or domain name for the secondary falloack LDAP server when IPv4 protocol is used Default undefined Secondary Host IPv6 Defines the IP address or domain name for the secondary falloack LDAP server when IPv6 protocol is used Default undefined 5 62 Basic Configuration LDAP Port Defines the port that will be used to communicate with the LDAP server Default 389 TLS SSL Enables Disables TLS SSL encryption Note that when TLS SSL encryption is enabled the LDAP Port should be set to 636 Default Off Bind Type Sets the LDAP bind request password type Note that in the Text Interface when the Bind Type is set to Kerberos LDAP the menu will include additional prompts used to select Kerberos parameters Default Simple Search Bind DN Selects the user name who is allowed to search the LDAP directory Default undefined Search Bind Password Sets the Password for the user who is allowed to search the LDAP directory Default undefined User Search Base DN Sets the directory location for user searches Default undefined User Search Filter Selects the att
119. al or similar names to two or more ports Hunt Groups can be defined using Any to Any Passive Buffer or Modem Mode Ports Note that the Network Port cannot be included in Hunt Groups 1 Access command mode using a port and account that permit Administrator level commands 2 Access the Port Configuration Menu for the desired Port s as described in Section 5 8 3 From the Port Configuration Menu define the Port Name 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign identical names to the other ports in the Hunt Group For example a series of ports in a group could all be named SERVER 5 To connect to the next available port in the hunt group invoke the C command using the port name to specify the desired group For example C SERVER Enter 6 Your port will be connected to the first available port in the group If all ports are presently connected the TSM RSM will respond with the BUSY message 7 It is only necessary to enter enough letters of the port name to differentiate Hunt Group ports from other ports Type an asterisk to represent the remaining characters in the name For example to connect to the first available port in a group of ports named SALES1 SALES2 and SALES3 the connect command can be invoked as C S Enter providing no other port names begin with the letter S Notes e f the Hunt Group method is used by a port or account with User level command access the C command will only connect to the por
120. ameters as described in Section 14 Harden Web Security When the Harden Web Security feature is On default only the high and medium cypher suites for SSLv3 and TLSv1 will be enabled When the Harden Web Security feature is Off all SSL protocols will be enabled allowing compatibility with older browsers Default On Note n the Text Interface this option is enabled disabled via the Web Access submenu TLS Mode Selects TLSv1 or TLSv1 1 Although TLSv1 1 provides better security the default settings of most browsers do not support TLSv1 1 For more information please refer to Section 14 4 Default TLSv1 Note n the Text Interface the TLS Mode parameter is located in the Web Access submenu SYSLOG Addresses Defines the IP addresses for the Syslog Daemon s that will receive log records generated by the TSM RSM Allows definition of IP addresses for both a primary Syslog Daemon and an optional secondary Syslog Daemon SYSLOG Addresses can be entered in either IPv4 or IPv6 format or in domain name format up to 64 characters For more information please refer to Section 11 Default undefined Notes The Syslog Address submenu in the Text Interface and the Network Parameters submenu in the Web Browser Interface both include a Ping Test function that can be used to ping the user selected Syslog IP Addresses in order to verify that valid IP addresses have been entered In order for the Ping Test feature to functio
121. at are used to connect common devices to the RJ 45 serial ports on a standard TSM Series or RSM xRy Series unit For information regarding other WTI cables and adapters please refer to the Serial Cables and Adapters document which can be found on the WTI Web Site at http www wti com guides serialcables adapters pdf Straight RJ 45 Cables and Rollover RJ 45 Cables The connection examples described in this section include the use either an RJ 45 Straight cable or an RJ 45 Rollover cable The difference between the two types of cables is the way that the pins in the connectors at each end of the cable are linked to each other In Straight Cables the pins on each connector are linked to the same pin number on the connector at the other end of the cable for example Pin 1 on the right hand connector is linked to Pin 1 on the left hand connector as shown in Figure C 1 below For Rollover Cables the order of the pins is reversed Pin 1 on the right hand connector would be linked to Pin 8 on the left hand connector as shown in Figure C 2 WTI RJ 45 Straight cables are available in three different models e RJX 7 15 15 Feet Long e RJX 7 25 25 Feet Long RJX 7 30 30 Feet Long WTI also offers an RJ 45 Rollover cable RJ ROLL Pin 1 C Pin 1 Pin 8 Pin 8 Figure C 1 Straight Cables Pin 1 Pin 8 Figure C 2 Rollover Cables Apx 6 Appendices C 2 Connecting DB 9M DTE Devices The DX9F DTE RJ Snap Adapter can be
122. at least one SNMP Manager SNMP Traps are automatically enabled when at least one SNMP Manager has been defined The SNMP Trap submenu includes a Ping Test function that can be used to ping the user selected SNMP Managers to verify that a valid IP address has been entered In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands Addresses for SNMP Managers can be defined in either IPv4 or IPv6 format as described in Section 5 9 7 b Trap Community Consult your network administrator and then use the Network Parameters menus to set the Trap Community Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined the TSM RSM will send an SNMP Trap each time an alarm is triggered 12 2 13 Operation via SNMP If SNMP Access Parameters have been defined as described in Section 5 9 6 then you will be able to manage user accounts control power and reboot switching and display unit status via SNMP This section describes SNMP communication with the TSM RSM unit and lists some common commands that can be employed to manage users control switching and reboot actions and display unit status 13 1 TSM RSM SNMP Agent The TSM RSM s SNMP Agent supports various configuration control status and event notification capabilities Managed objects are described in the WTI RSM TSM MIB txt document which can be found on the WTI web site http www wti com The WTI RSM TSM MIB txt document ca
123. aving Configuration message is displayed After the new configuration has been saved test the Self Signed certificate by accessing the TSM RSM via the Web Interface using an HTTPS connection a Before the connection is established the TSM RSM should display the warning message described previously This indicates that the Self Signed certificate has been successfully created and saved b Click on the Yes button to proceed The TSM RSM will prompt you to enter a user name and password After keying in your password the main menu should be displayed indicating that you have successfully accessed command mode 14 2 Creating a Signed Certificate To create a Signed certificate and eliminate the warning message first set up your domain name server to recognize the Common Name item 5 that you will assign to the unit Next complete steps one through five as described in Section 14 1 and then proceed as follows 1 Capture the Newly Created Certificate Type 13 and press Enter View CSR The TSM RSM will prompt you to configure your communications Telnet program to receive the certificate Set up your communications program to receive a binary file and then press Enter to capture the file and save it This is the Code Signing Request that you will send to the outside security service e g VeriSign Thawte etc in order to have them sign and activate the certificate Obtain the Signed Certificate Send the captured cert
124. ayed via the Product Status Screen in the Web Interface or via the J command in the Text Interface Default Undefined 5 3 The The Basic Configuration Login Banner Allows definition of a banner message that will be displayed when a valid username and password are entered during log in The Login Banner can be used to post legal warning regarding unauthorized access to the unit or to display other user defined information or instructions Default Undefined Notes Although the Login Banner will be displayed when the TSM RSM is accessed via both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface the Login Banner can only be defined via the Text Interface The Login Banner can be up to 1024 characters long The Login Banner text must begin with the banner command and end with the lt banner gt command Banner text can be copied and pasted from a text editor or sent in from a file For best results the individual text lines in the Login Banner should be less than 80 characters wide 1 The Real Time Clock and Calendar Real Time Clock menu is used to set the TSM RSM s internal clock and calendar configuration menu for the Real Time Clock offers the following options Date Sets the Month Date Year and day of the week Time Sets the Hour Minute and Second for the TSM RSM s real time clock calendar Key in the time using the 24 hour military format Time Zone Sets the time zone relative to Greenwic
125. c kee ESS ue RUPEE eb ed we ae e RD bare ena 14 5 Saving and Restoring Configuration Parameters 000 cee eee eee eee 15 1 15 1 Sending Parameters to a File sees eee 15 1 15 1 1 Downloading amp Saving Parameters via Text Interface 15 1 15 1 2 Downloading amp Saving Parameters via Web Browser Interface 15 2 15 2 Restoring Downloaded Parameters 0 00 c cece tees 15 2 15 3 Restoring Recently Saved Parameters 0 0 00 cece eet 15 3 Vii Table of Contents 16 Upgrading TSM RSM Firmware eseeeeeee RII HII II 16 1 16 1 WMU Enterprise Management Software Recommended iusuussusue 16 1 16 2 The Upgrade Firmware Function Alternate Method eee 16 1 17 Command Reference Guide 0 0 00 c eee eee eee eee eee 17 1 17 1 Command Conventions 17 1 17 2 Command Summary isseseseeeeee hn 17 2 17 3 Command Set ele Rei ide ida ee ege ded ee dox 17 3 17 3 1 Display Commands 00 0 0 17 3 17 3 2 Control Commands 00 enn 17 7 17 3 3 Configuration Commands 0 000 ett eee 17 14 Appendices A Specifications oi menm eels ere ea eee SS ace gece dee de RR UR Rm aes SS Apx 1 A 1 Standard TSM Series Units and Standard RSM Series Units Apx 1 A 2 RSM xRy Series Units 0 00 00 tte ees Apx 2 B Serial Interface Description llseeseeeereee n Apx 3 B 1
126. ce Notes e Configuration menus are only available when you have logged into command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands SuperUser accounts are able to view configuration menus but are not allowed to change parameters e Configuration menus are not available when you are communicating with the TSM RSM via PDA When defining parameters via the Text Interface make certain to press the Esc key several times to completely exit from the configuration menu and save newly defined parameters When parameters are defined via the Text Interface newly defined parameters will not be saved until the Saving Configuration message has been displayed and the cursor returns to the command prompt Basic Configuration 5 3 Defining System Parameters The System Parameters menus are used to define the Site ID Message set the system clock and calendar set up log functions and calibrate temperature readings In the Text Interface the System Parameters menu is also used to create and manage user accounts and passwords Note however that when you are communicating with the unit via the Web Browser Interface accounts and passwords are managed and created using a separate menu that is accessed by clicking on the Users link on the left hand side of the menu To access the System Parameters menu via the Text Interface type F and press Enter To access the System Parameters menu via the Web Browser Interface place the
127. ckbox in the SNMP Access Parameters menu is checked SNMP Access Parameters menu allows the following parameters to be defined Enable Enables disables SNMP Polling Default Off Note This item only applies to external SNMP polling of the TSM RSM it does not effect the ability of the TSM RSM to send SNMP traps Version This parameter determines which SNMP Version the TSM RSM will respond to For example if this item is set to V3 then clients who attempt to contact the TSM RSM using SNMPv2 will not be allowed to connect Default V1 V2 Only Read Only Enables Disables the Read Only Mode which controls the ability to access configuration functions and invoke switching commands When Enabled you will not be able to change configuration parameters or invoke other commands when you contact the TSM RSM via SNMP Default No Note n order to define user names for the TSM RSM via your SNMP client the Read Only feature must be disabled When the Read Only feature is enabled you will not be able to issue configuration commands to the unit via SNMP 5 59 Basic Configuration Authentication Privacy Configures the Authentication and Privacy features for SNMPv3 communication The Authentication Privacy parameter offers two options which function as follows 1 Auth noPriv An SNMPv3 username and password will be required at log in but encryption will not be used Default Setting 2 Auth Priv An SNMPv3 username and
128. col SNMPv3 Only Selects AES or DES encryption support Default DES SNMP Contact Default undefined SNMP Location Default undefined Read Only Community Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP Version is set to V3 Default Public Read Write Community Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP Version is set to V3 Default Public 5 60 Basic Configuration 5 9 7 SNMP Trap Parameters These menus are used to select parameters that will be used when SNMP traps are sent For more information on SNMP Traps please refer to Section 12 In the Text Interface the SNMP Trap Parameters menu is accessed via the Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface the SNMP Trap Parameters menu is accessed via the flyout menus under the Network Configuration link The SNMP Trap Parameters menu allows the following parameters to be defined Notes In the Text Interface SNMP Trap parameters are defined via two separate menus that are accessed via either the N command IPv4 or the N6 command IPv6 In the web browser interfrace SNMP Trap parameters are defined via two separate submenus that are accessed via the IPv4 or IPv6 flyout menus under the SNMP Traps link SNMP Manager 1 The IP Address for the first SNMP Manager For more information please refer to Section 12 Default Undefined Note n order to enable the SNMP Trap feature you must define at least one S
129. count that permits Telnet Access and Outbound Access via one of the TSM RSM s Serial RS232 Ports as described below Notes n order for the TELNET command to function Telnet Access and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 5 5 The TELNET command is only available via the Text Interface e f you have logged in via the Network Port the TELNET command will not function unless Outbound Access has been enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 To create an outbound Telnet connection access the Text Interface via a free Serial Port using an account that permits Telnet Access and Outbound Access and then invoke the TELNET command using the following format TELNET ip port raw Enter Where ip Is the target IP address port Is an optional argument which can be included to indicate the target port at the IP address raw Is an optional argument which can be included to indicate a raw socket connection In order to create a raw socket connection the command line must end with the text raw For example to create a raw socket outbound Telnet connection to port 2000 at IP Address 255 255 255 255 access the Text Interface command mode via a free TSM RSM Serial Port using an account that permits Telnet Access and Outbound Access and invoke the TELNET command as follows TELNET 255 255 255 255 2000 raw Enter 10 9 Telnet amp SSH Functions 10 6 Creating an
130. ct Default undefined Note When configuring a TSM RSM unit that includes an internal modem the Port Access parameter is also used to grant or deny user access to the internal modem port On 8 port TSM RSM units port 9 is the internal modem port on 16 port RSM units port 17 is the internal modem port on 24 port TSM units port 25 is the internal modem port on 40 port TSM units port 41 is the internal modem port The internal modem is not included on TSM RSM model numbers that end with the NMI suffix or on RSM 2R4 Series units Plug Access RSM xRy Series Units Only This item is used to determine which plugs members of this group will be allowed to control Default undefined Note Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Access parameter and Plug Group Access parameter are not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units 5 64 Basic Configuration Plug Group Access RSM xRy Series Units Only This item is used to determine which plug groups the members of this LDAP Group will be allowed to control Default undefined Service Access Selects access methods for this LDAP Group Determines whether members of this LDAP Group will be allowed to access command mode via Serial Port Telnet SSH Web and or to establish outbound connections Also enables disables Outbound Telnet Default Serial Port On Telnet SSH On Outbound Access Off Note After d
131. cted the TSM RSM will start the receiving servers and wait for an FTP SFTP client to make a connection and upload a valid firmware binary image To proceed with the upgrade select either option 1 or option 2 The TSM RSM will display a message that indicates that the unit is waiting for data Leave the current Telnet SSH client session connected at this time Open your FTP SFTP application and if you have not already done so login to the TSM RSM unit using a username and password that permit access to Administrator Level commands Transfer the md5 format upgrade file to the TSM RSM After the file transfer is complete the TSM RSM will install the upgrade file and then reboot itself and break all port connections Note that it will take approximately 10 minutes to complete the installation process The unit will remain accessible until it reboots a SomeFTP SFTP applications may not automatically close when the file transfer is complete If this is the case you may close your FTP SFTP client manually after it indicates that the file has been successfully transferred b When the upgrade process is complete the TSM RSM will send a message to all currently connected network sessions indicating that the TSM RSM is going down for a reboot Note Do not power down the TSM RSM unit while it is in the process of installing the upgrade file This can damage the unit s operating system 16 2 Upgrading TSM RSM Firmware 8 lf you hav
132. cute 4 Mark to DEFAULT does not execute 5 Mark to turn ON and execute plug group actions 6 Mark to turn OFF and execute plug group actions 7 Mark to BOOT and execute plug group actions 8 Mark to DEFAULT and execute plug group actions Set plugGroupTable plugGroupAction to desired action as specified by values 1 4 above for each plug group index the action is to be applied to For the last plug group you wish to set before executing the commands use values 5 8 instead which will invoke the requested commands all at once 15 5 Operation via SNMP 13 5 Configuring Serial Ports Commands can be issued to set certain serial port configuration parameters via SNMP Ports are arranged in a table of 9 rows with one row for each serial port Serial port parameters are described below portTable portID String indicating the serial port s ID e portTable portThreshold An integer that sets the serial port s Buffer Threshold value If this value is set between 1 and 32 757 then the SNMP trap function is enabled and traps will be sent to the SNMP Managers whenever the buffer for this port reaches the specified level If set to 0 zero then SNMP Traps related to the Buffer Threshold will be disabled at this port portTable portStatus Shows the connection status of each port If a port is connected the portStatus object will return the number of the other port in the connection pair free Disconnect port
133. d pingNoAnswerClearTrap Indicates that the Ping No Answer Alarm has been cleared 13 9 Operation via SNMP lockoutSetTrap Indicates that the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm has been triggered The trap will also include a numerical value that indicates the number of the serial port where the lockout occurred lockoutClearTrap Indicates that the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm has been cleared powercycleSetTrap Indicates that the Power Cycle Alarm has been triggered Note that there is no corresponding Clear Trap for the Power Cycle Alarm bufferThresholdCrossedSetTrap Indicates that the amount of data in the serial port buffer has exceeded the currently defined Buffer Threshold value The trap will also include a the number of the port where the Buffer Threshold Alarm was generated and a numerical value that indicates the amount of data currently stored in the port buffer bufferThresholdCrossedClearTrap Indicates that the data in the port buffer has either been read or erased and that the Buffer Threshold Alarm has been cleared plugCurrentSetTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Plug Current Alarm has been triggered plugCurrentClearTrap RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Indicates that the Plug Current Alarm has been Cleared lostCommSetTrap Indicates that the Lost Communication Alarm has been triggered lostCommClearTrap Indicates that the Lost Communication Alarm has been cleared plugCur
134. d devices to access the TSM RSM s internal modem or network port Note The Web Browser Interface cannot be used to connect ports but can be used to disconnect ports In order to connect ports you must access command mode via the Text Interface As discussed in Section 5 8 1 There are four available operating modes for the TSM RSM serial ports the Any to Any Mode the Passive Mode the Buffer Mode the Modem Mode and the Modem PPP Mode 9 1 1 Any to Any Mode Any to Any Mode Ports can be connected to other Any to Any Passive Buffer or Modem Mode ports by accessing command mode via the Text Interface and issuing the C Command All ports can be configured for Any to Any Mode and it is also the default mode for Port 1 Operation 9 1 1 1 Connecting Ports Text Interface Two different types of connections can be made between TSM RSM serial ports Resident Connections and Third Party Connections The TSM RSM allows communication between devices without the requirement that both ports use the same communication parameters Resident Connections Your resident port issues a C command to connect to a second port For example Port 4 issues the C command to connect to Port 5 Third Party Connections Administrator and SuperUser Mode Only Your resident port issues a C command to create a connection between two other ports For example Port 1 is your resident port and Port 1 issues a command to connect Port 2 to Port 3 Note
135. d begin configuring the IP Security feature proceed as follows Notes Both the Allow and Deny list can include Linux operators wild cards and net mask pairs In some cases it is not necessary to enter all four digits of the IP Address For example if you wish to allow access to all IP addresses that begin with 192 then you would only need to enter 192 The IP Security Configuration menu is only available when the Administrator Mode is active In order to use domain names in the Allow List and or Deny List you must first define IP address es for the desired Domain Name Server s as described in Section 5 9 5 1 Access the IP Security Configuration Menu 8 Text Interface Type N Enter to define addresses in IPv4 format or type N6 and press Enter to define addresses in IPv6 format The Network Configuration Menu will be displayed From the Network Configuration Menu type 5 Enter to display the IP Security Menu Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the IP Security Link to display the IP Security Menu The IP Security menu in the Web Browser Interface will accept addresses in either IPv4 or IPv6 format 2 Allow List Enter the IP Address es for the clients that you wish to allow Note that if an IP Address is found in the Allow list the client will be allowed to connect and the TSM RSM w
136. d or denied When ALL is included in the Allow list all IP addresses will be allowed to connect conversely if ALL is included in the Deny list all IP Addresses will be denied except for IP addresses listed in the Allow list For example if the Deny list includes a line which reads ALL EXCEPT 168 255 192 192 then all IP addresses except 168 255 192 192 will be denied except for IP addresses that are listed in the Allow list Net Mask Pairs An expression of the form n n n n m m m m is interpreted as a net mask pair A host address is matched if net is equal to the bitwise AND of the address and the mask For example the net mask pattern 131 155 72 0 255 255 254 0 matches every address in the range 131 155 72 0 through 131 155 73 255 5 9 3 3 IP Security Examples 1 Mostly Closed Access is denied by default and the only clients allowed are those explicitly listed in the Allow list To deny access to all clients except 192 255 255 192 and 168 112 112 05 the Allow and Deny lists would be defined as follows Allow List 1 192 255 255 192 2 168 112 112 05 Deny List 1 ALL 5 57 Basic Configuration 2 Mostly Open Access is granted by default and the only clients denied access are those explicitly listed in the Deny list and as exceptions in the Allow list To allow access to all clients except 192 255 255 192 and 168 112 112 05 the Allow and Deny lists would be defined as follows Allow List
137. d voltage conditions at remote equipment sites If current or power usage exceeds user defined threshold values the RSM 8R8 CM can also generate alarms and shut down user designated non essential devices 1 1 Introduction WTI Management Utility TSM RSM units include the WTI Enterprise Management Utility WMU which allows you to manage multiple WTI units via a single menu For more information on the Enterprise Management Utility please refer to the WMU User s Guide which can be downloaded from the WTI web site at http www wti com t product manuals aspx Model Numbers Covered This User s Guide discusses several different models from our TSM Series RSM Series RSM xRy Series product lines Throughout this User s Guide all of these units are referred to as the TSM RSM In addition when power control features are discussed all RSM 16R16 models RSM 8R8 models and RSM 2R4 models are referred to as RSM xRy Series Units Typographic Conventions e g X Indicates a control character For example the text X Control X indicates the Ctrl key and the X key must be pressed simultaneously COURIER FONT Indicates characters typed on the keyboard For example RB or ON 2 Bold Font Text set in bold face and enclosed in square brackets indicates a specific key For example Enter or Esc lt gt Indicates required keyboard entries For Example P lt n gt Indicates optional keyboard entries Fo
138. defined Plug Groups whenever current consumption rises above a user defined threshold value To configure the Plug Current Alarm access the RSM 8R8 CM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands and then use the Alarm Configuration menu to select the desired alarm feature The Plug Current Alarm allows the following parameters to be defined Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Note When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all other alarms For example if the Plug Current Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other alarms will also be enabled Plug Hysteresis This parameter can be used to prevent the Plug Current Alarm from generating excessive Alarm and Clear messages when current consumption fluctuates back and forth across the trigger value Basically the Plug Hysteresis parameter allows you to define a margin at both the Low Threshold and High Threshold that the current level must cross in order to clear an alarm Default 0 5 Amps Plug Hystere
139. dem port Q Serial Ports For connection to console ports on target devices Standard RJ45 connectors configured as DCE ports For more information on connecting devices to the serial ports please refer to Section 4 5 and Appendix B and Appendix C _ ON Indicator An LED Indicator which lights when AC Power is applied to the unit RDY Indicator Ready Flashes to indicate that the unit is ready to receive commands e DEFAULT Button Switches all plugs Off or sets plugs to default values as described in Section 2 11 RESET Button Restarts the RSM 2R4 as described in Section 2 11 Qo Output Status Indicators A series of four LED indicators which light when power is applied to the corresponding switched outlet Unit Description Figure 2 16 RSM 2R4 2F Back Panel 2 10 RSM 2R4 Back Panel As shown in Figures 2 15 and 2 16 the RSM 2R4 series back panel includes the following components Power Inlet An IEC 320 C14 inlet for connection to your 100 to 240 VAC power supply Switched Outlets Four AC Outlets that can be switched On Off or rebooted in response to user commands e RSM 2R4 1F Four 4 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 8R8 2F Four 4 each IEC320 C13 Outlets Unit Description 2 11 Front Panel Button Functions The front panel buttons can be used to perform several functions described below Notes Front Panel button functions can also be disabled via the System Parameters
140. device and pass them along to a connected port When enabled breaks received at this port will be passed to any port this port is connected to and sent to the device connected to the other port When disabled breaks will be refused at this port Default 2 On Multiple Logins Text Interface Only If the TSM RSM is installed in an environment that does not include communication via an open network local communication only then the Multiple Logins parameter can be used to determine whether or not multiple users will be able to communicate with the unit at the same time If this parameter is set to Off then only one user will be allowed to communicate with the unit at a time Default On 5 48 Basic Configuration 5 9 2 Network Parameters In the Text Interface these parameters are accessed via the main Network Configuration menu which is activated by typing N for IPv4 parameters or N6 for IPv6 parameters and then pressing Enter In the Web Browser Interface these parameters are found by placing the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen and then clicking on the Network Parameters link in the resulting fly out menu Note The P Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address and DHCP status cannot be changed via the Web Browser Interface In order to change these parameters you must access the TSM RSM via the Text Interface IP Address Defaults IPv4 192 168 168 168 IPv6 unde
141. devices to the TSM RSM serial ports please refer to Appendix C for information regarding cables and adapters After connecting new devices to TSM RSM Serial Ports access the TSM RSM command mode and select communication parameters for each serial port as described in Section 5 8 This completes the TSM RSM installation instructions Please proceed to the next Section for instructions regarding basic unit configuration Emergency Shut Off Function RSM xRy series units also include an Emergency Shut Off function that can be used to immediately shut off all RSM power outlets in case of emergency For more information regarding the Emergency Shut Off feature please contact WTI Tech Support at service wti com 5 Basic Configuration This section describes the basic configuration procedure for all TSM RSM units For more information on Alarm Configuration please refer to Section 7 Communicating with the TSM RSM Unit In order to configure the TSM RSM you must first connect to the unit and access command mode Note that the TSM RSM offers two separate configuration interfaces the Web Browser Interface and the Text Interface In addition the TSM RSM also offers three different methods for accessing command mode via network via modem or via local console The Web Browser interface is only available via network and the Text Interface is available via network SSH or Telnet modem or local PC 5 1 1 The Text Interface T
142. ding that the ping command has not been disabled at the Network Port The Invalid Access Lockout configuration menus allow you to select the following parameters Serial Port Protection Serial Port Lockout Enables Disables the Invalid Access Lockout function for the serial SetUp Port and selects lockout parameters When this item is enabled and excessive Invalid Access attempts are detected at the SetUp Port the SetUp Port will be locked until the user defined Lockout Duration period elapses or until the UL command is issued Serial Port Protection Enables Disables the Invalid Access Lockout feature for the serial SetUp Port Default Off Lockout Attempts The number of invalid attempts that must occur in order to trigger the Invalid Access Lockout feature at the serial SetUp Port Default 9 Lockout Duration This option selects the length of time that the serial SetUp Port will remain locked when Invalid Access Lockout occurs If the duration is set at Infinite then ports will remained locked until the UL command is issued Default 30 Minutes Basic Configuration SSH Protection Enables Disables and configures the Invalid Access function for SSH connections When this item is enabled and excessive Invalid Access Attempts via SSH are detected then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for the user defined SSH Lockout Duration Period or until the UL command is issued Note that for SSH protec
143. displayed and the cursor returns to the command prompt 7 4 1 2 Configuring the Ping No Answer Alarm TSM and RSM Series Units To configure the Ping No Answer Alarm you must access command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Ping No Answer alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes In order for this alarm to function at least one target IP Address for the Ping No Answer Alarm must be defined as described in Section 7 4 1 1 To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter to Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Ping No Answer Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes e Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused
144. e password command access level port plug access rights service access rights and an optional callback number 5 4 1 Command Access Levels In order to restrict access to important command functions the TSM RSM allows you to set the command access level for each user account The TSM RSM offers four different access levels Administrator SuperUser User and View Only Command privileges for each user account are set using the Add User or Modify User menus Each access level grants permission to use a different selection of commands lower access levels are restricted from invoking configuration commands while Administrators are granted access to all commands The four access levels are described below Note Power switching functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power related functions are not present on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units Administrator Administrators are allowed to invoke all configuration and operation commands can view all status screens and can always connect to all serial ports and direct switching commands to all of the TSM RSM s switched outlets SuperUser SuperUsers are allowed to invoke all port connection and power switching commands and view all status screens SuperUsers can view configuration menus but are not allowed to change configuration parameters SuperUsers are granted access to all serial ports and switched outlets User Users are allowed to invoke port co
145. e defined via the Plug Group Access parameter ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the status of permitted Plug Groups but are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot commands 5 67 Basic Configuration Service Access Selects the default Service Access setting for new TACACS users Determines whether each account will be able to access command mode via Serial Port Telnet SSH or Web In addition the Service Access setting also determines whether each account will be able to employ the Outbound Access function Default Serial Port On Telnet SSH On Web On Outbound Access Off Note f Outbound Access has been disabled via the Network Parameters menu then the Service Access parameter will not be allowed to grant Outbound Access to new TACACS users gt Current Power Metering RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only Determines whether or not new TACACS users will be allowed to access current metering and power metering functions by default Default Off Ping Test Ping TACACS Servers Allows you to ping IP addresses or domain names that have been defined via the TACACS Parameters menus in order to check that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered Notes In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can
146. e enabled via the Network Parameters menu as described in Section 5 9 2 f you have logged in via the Network Port the TELNET command will not function Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format TELNET ip port raw Enter Where ip Is the target IP address The IP Address can be entered in either IPv4 or IPv6 format port lIs an optional argument which can be included to indicate the target port at the IP address raw Isan optional argument which can be included to indicate a raw socket connection In order to create a raw socket connection the command line must end with the text raw 17 12 Command Reference Guide SSH Outbound SSH Creates an outbound SSH connection Notes In order for the SSH command to function Telnet SSH and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 5 5 In addition SSH Access and Outbound Access must also be enabled via the Network Parameters menu as described in Section 5 9 2 e f you have logged in via the Network Port the SSH command will not function Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format SSH ip 1 username Enter Where ip Is the target IP address The IP Address can be entered in either IPv4 or IPv6 format 1 Lowercase letter L Indicates that the next argument will be the log on name username ls the username that you wish to use to log in to the target device BROADCAST Broadcast T
147. e yourcompanyname com 6 State or Province The name of the state or province where the TSM RSM unit will be located e g California 7 Locality The city or town where the TSM RSM unit will be located e g Irvine 8 Country The two character country code for the nation where the TSM RSM will be located e g US 9 Email Address An email address that can be used to contact the person responsible for the TSM RSM e g jsmith yourcompany com 10 Organizational Name The name of your company or organization e g Yourcompanyname Inc 11 Organizational Unit The name of your department or division if necessary any random text can be entered in this field e g tech support 14 2 Setting Up SSL Encryption After you have defined parameters 5 through 11 type 12 and press Enter Create CSR to create a Certificate Signing Request By default this will overwrite any existing certificate and create a new Self Signed certificate a The TSM RSM will prompt you to create a password Key in the desired password up to 16 characters and then press Enter When the TSM RSM prompts you to verify the password key it again and then press Enter once After a brief pause the TSM RSM will return to the Web Access Menu indicating that the CSR has been successfully created b When the Web Access Menu is re displayed press Esc several times until you exit from the Network Parameters menu and the S
148. e Log menu appears key in the number for the Erase function press Enter and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Notes The TSM RSM dedicates a fixed amount of internal memory for Audit Log records and if log records are allowed to accumulate until this memory is filled memory will eventually wrap around and older records will be overwritten by newer records Note that once records have been erased they cannot be recovered In RSM 8R8 CM series units the Temperature Log displayed as a part of the Current Metering Log Basic Configuration 5 3 4 Callback Security The Callback function provides an additional layer of security when callers attempt to access command mode via modem When this function is properly configured modem users will not be granted immediate access to command mode upon entering a valid password instead the unit will disconnect and dial a user defined number before allowing access via that number If desired users may also be required to re enter the password after the TSM RSM dials back In order for Callback Security to function properly you must first enable and configure the feature as described in this section and then define a callback number for each desired user account as described in Section 5 5 To access the Callback Security menu via the Text Interface type F and press Enter and then select the Callback Security option To access the Callback Security menu via the
149. e Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select TACACS RADIUS Displays a submenu which is used to define RADIUS parameters as described in Section 5 9 10 Note 7o define RADIUS parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select RADIUS Email Messaging Displays a submenu which is used to define Email Messaging parameters as described in Section 5 9 11 Note 7o define Email Messaging parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select Email Messaging Ping Access Configures the TSM RSM s response to ping commands Ping Access can be set to block all ping commands allow all ping commands or only accept ping commands from user specified IP addresses Limited When the Limited option is selected up to four permitted IP address can be defined via the submenu Note that disabling Ping Access at the Network Port will not effect the operation of the Ping No Access Alarm Default Allow All 5 52 Basic Configuration Outbound Access Enables Disables the ability to create outbound Telnet and or SSH connections via the TSM RSM s Network Port When enabled users who are connected to the TSM RSM command mode via one of the serial ports will be able to connect to the Network
150. e TSM RSM to switch to the other Ethernet port the TSM RSM will not return to the initial Ethernet port after that connection is restored For example if a network outage at Ethernet Port 0 causes the unit to switch to Ethernet Port 1 the unit will not automatically switch back to Ethernet Port 0 after the network connection is restored Telnet Access Enables disables Telnet access When Telnet Access is Off users will not be allowed to establish a Telnet connection to the unit or initiate outbound Telnet or SSH connections Default On Telnet Port Selects the TCP IP port number that will be used for Telnet connections Default 23 Note n the Text Interface this item is defined via a submenu which is displayed when the Telnet Access parameter is selected Max Per Source Per Source The maximum number of Telnet sessions that will be allowed per user MAC address Default 4 Notes In the Text Interface the Max Per Source Per Source parameter is defined via a submenu of item 21 Telnet Access in the Network Parameters menu After changing the Max Per Source parameter you must log out of all pre existing Telnet sessions in order for the new maximum value to be applied SSH Access Enables disables SSH communication Default On SSH Port The TCP IP port number used for SSH connections Default 22 Note n the Text Interface this item is defined via a submenu which is displayed when SSH Acc
151. e TSM RSM will return to the command prompt Copy Parameters When you have finished selecting parameters press Esc to copy the selected parameters The TSM RSM will display a confirmation prompt before executing the copy command Type Y to proceed or N to cancel the command and then press Enter 5 45 Basic Configuration 5 9 Network Configuration The Network Parameters Menus are used to select parameters and options for the Network Port and also allow you to implement various security and authentication features To access the Network Parameters menus proceed as follows The Network Parameters menu allows you to define the parameters discussed in the following sections Although the Web Browser Interface and Text Interface allow definition of essentially the same parameters parameters are arranged differently in the two interfaces In the Text Interface most network parameters are defined via one menu But in the Web Browser Interface network parameters are divided into separate menus which are accessed via the Network Configuration flyout menu Notes e Settings for network parameters depend on the configuration of your network Please contact your network administrator for appropriate settings The Network Parameters Menu selects parameters for all logical Network Ports The IP Address Subnet Address and Gateway Address cannot be changed via the Web Browser Interface In order to change these parameters you must
152. e Web Interface DNS Server parameters are defined via a seperate submenu which is accessed via a flyout menu under the Network Parametes Link on the left hand side of the screen Negotiation Text Interface Only This parameter can be used to solve synchronization problems when the TSM RSM unit negotiates communication parameters with another device Default Auto Notes f the other device is set for automatic negotiation then the TSM RSM s Negotiation parameter should also be set to Auto f the other device is not set for automatic negotiation then the TSM RSM s Negotiation parameter should be set to match the other device e g 100 Full 5 49 Basic Configuration Fallback Units with Dual Ethernet Ports Only Enables disables Ethernet fallback capabilities When enabled TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet Port will automatically switch to the other Ethernet port whenever the unit detects that a network connection cannot be established via the Ethernet port that is currently in use Note that when the Fallback feature is enabled the same IP Address will be assigned to both Ethernet Port 0 and Ethernet Port 1 Default Off Notes When Fallback is enabled identical MAC addresses will be assigned to each TSM RSM Ethernet Port When Fallback is enabled the two TSM RSM Ethernet Ports will be bonded and will share the common parameters of Ethernet Port 0 After the Fallback feature causes th
153. e a link that can be used to jump to the other protocol 5 46 Basic Configuration Units with Optional Secondary Ethernet Ports An optional secondary Ethernet Port is available for some TSM Series units and some RSM xRy Series units When the secondary Ethernet Port is present this allows the two ports to either be dedicated to separate applications users or employed to provide network fallback capabilities In cases where the two Ethernet ports will be used for separate applications a separate IP address is assigned to each port In cases where the two Ethernet ports are used to provide fallback capabilities the same IP address is generally assigned to each Ethernet port On dual Ethernet TSM RSM units the top Ethernet port is port zero and the bottom Ethernet port is port 1 In addition both Ethernet ports can be configured for both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols Note n units with Dual Ethernet Ports all port parameters except the IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DHCP setting and Negotiation setting are shared by both Ethernet ports Shared parameters selected for Ethernet port 0 will also be applied to Ethernet port 7 To select network parameters for TSM RSM units that include Dual Ethernet ports proceed as follows Text Interface To define IPv4 parameters for Ethernet port zero type NO and press Enter To define IPv4 parameters for Ethernet port one type N1 and press Enter To define IPv6 parameters for E
154. e accessed the TSM RSM via the Network Port in order to start the FTP SFTP servers the TSM RSM will break the network connection when the system is reinitialized e f you initially selected Start FTP SFTP Servers and Save Parameters you may then reestablish a connection with the TSM RSM using your former IP address f you initially selected Start FTP SFTP Servers and Default Parameters you must then login using the TSM RSM s default IP address Default 192 168 168 168 or access command mode via Serial Port 1 or via Modem When firmware upgrades are available WTI will provide the necessary files At that time an updated Users Guide or addendum will also be available 16 3 17 Command Reference Guide 17 1 Command Conventions Most commands described in this section conform to the following conventions Power Control Functions Standard TSM Series units and Standard RSM Series units do not support power control functions Power reboot and switching functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Apply Command to All Ports When an asterisk is entered as the argument of the D Disconnect or E commands Erase Buffer the command will be applied to all ports For example to erase all port buffers type E Enter Apply Command to All Plugs RSM xRy Series Units Only When an asterisk is entered as the argument of the ON Switch Plugs On OFF Switch Plugs Off or BOOT Reboot Plugs commands the com
155. e for venting Control Ports Ethernet Port 10 100Base T RJ45 multi session Telnet Optional Secondary 10 100Base T Ethernet Port Available on Some Models Internal Modem Port Phone Line Optional RJ11 connector for connection to your Telco line De J X Mine Apx 2 Appendix B Serial Interface Description TSM Series and Pine aria RTS 1 Request to Send DTR 2 Ready Out TXD 3 Data Out GND 4 Ground Ping Pin4 5 i RXD 6 Data In DCD 7 Carrier Detect CTS 8 Clear to Send Figure B 1 TSM Series and RSM xRy Series RS232 Port Interface RJ45 Pin No RSM Series Units DCD Carrier Detect DB9 format RXD Data In ay E Date ouk Pint Ping DTR Ready Out Ground Request to Send Clear to Send o z o on Oa ho Na Figure B 2 RSM Series RS232 Port Interface DB9 B 1 Serial Port RS232 DCD and DTR hardware lines function as follows 1 When connected a If either port is set for Modem Mode the DTR output at either port reflects the DCD input at the other end b Ifneither port is set for Modem Mode DTR output is held high active 2 When not connected a Ifthe port is set for Modem Mode upon disconnect DTR output is pulsed for 0 5 seconds and then held high b Ifthe port is not
156. e left hand side of the screen 3 After a brief pause your browser may display a prompt asking if you want to open or save the downloaded file At this point you can either select the Save option to save the parameters file to the download folder on your PC or select Save As to pick a different location and or filename for the saved parameters file 15 2 Restoring Downloaded Parameters This section describes the procedure for using your terminal emulation program to send saved parameters to the TSM RSM Note The Restore Parameters feature is only available via the Text Interface 1 Start your terminal emulation program and access the TSM RSM s Text Interface command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands 2 Configure your terminal emulation program to upload an ASCII file 3 Upload the ASCII text file with the saved TSM RSM parameters If necessary key in the file name and directory path 4 Your terminal emulation program will send the ASCII text file to the TSM RSM When the terminal program is finished with the upload make certain to terminate the Upload mode Note f the TSM RSM detects an error in the file it will respond with the Invalid Parameter message If an error message is received carefully check the contents of the parameters file correct the problem and then repeat the Upload procedure 5 Ifthe parameter upload is successful the TSM RSM will send a confirmation message
157. e powered by the Branch A Power Inlets e RSM 16R16 1 Eight 8 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 16R16 2 Eight 8 each IEC320 C13 Outlets Branch B Switched Outlets Eight switched AC outlets that are powered by the Branch B Power Inlets e RSM 16R16 1 Eight 8 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 16R16 2 Eight 8 each IEC320 C13 Outlets 2 7 Unit Description www wti com RSM 8R8 SERIAL PORTS MEER UU UENI NE MEME e EE I Remote Site Manager Power Control Figure 2 11 RSM 8R8 Series Front Panel 2 7 RSM 8R8 Series Front Panel As shown in Figure 2 11 the RSM 8R8 series front panel includes the following components Phone Line Port Internal Modem Port When the optional Internal Modem is present the phone line port is used for connection to your external phone line Network Port s RJ45 Ethernet port s for connection to your 10Base T or 100Base T TCP IP network The RSM 8R8 features a default IPv4 format address 192 168 168 168 This allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address The Network Port also includes two LED indicators for Link and Data Activity For more information on port configuration please refer to Section 5 9 Note e Some RSM 8R8 series units include an optional secondary Ethernet Port This allows the RSM 8R8 to be connectd to both a primary network and secondary network When two Network Ports are present the top Network Port is ETHO
158. eboot parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add Scheduled Reboot button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the RSM xhy Series unit displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 6 2 1 Adding Scheduled Reboots RSM xRy Series units allow up to 54 Scheduled Reboots to be defined The Add Scheduled Reboot menu allows you to define the following parameters for each new Scheduled Reboot Scheduled Reboot Name Assigns a name to this Scheduled Reboot Default undefined Plug Action Determines whether the Scheduled Reboot will result in the outlet s being switched Off or cycled Off and then On again Reboot Note that when Off is selected the Day On option and the Time On option can be used to select a time and day when the outlet s will be switched back On again Default Turn Off Time Determines the time of the day that this Scheduled Reboot will occur on Default 12 00 Day Access This prompt provides access to a submenu which is used to determine which day s of the week this Scheduled Reboot will be performed The Day Access parameter can also be used to schedule a daily reboot to schedule a daily reboot use the Day Access submenu to select every day of the week Default undefined Note f you wish to Schedule an RSM xhy Series unit to switch an
159. ection to a specific serial port of your choice without first being presented with the command interface This allows you to connect to a TCP port that is mapped directly to one of the TSM RSM s serial ports Direct Connect employs unique pre assigned TCP port numbers for each serial port The user connects to the port of choice by including the associated TCP port number in the Telnet or SSH connect command line The Direct Connect feature can be individually configured at each serial port and can be used to connect to Any to Any Passive Buffer or Modem Mode ports 10 3 1 Standard Telnet Protocol SSH and Raw Socket The Direct Connect feature allows you to establish port connections using either Standard Telnet Protocol SSH encryption or Raw Socket When Standard Telnet Protocol is used the TSM RSM will respond to all IACs When configuring a serial port to allow Direct Connections using SSH protocol note that the Direct Connect option Port Configuration Menu Item 31 must be set to On Password as described in Section 10 3 2 When configuring a serial port to allow Direct Connections using either Standard Telnet or Raw Socket Mode note that the Direct Connect option Port Configuration Menu Item 31 may be set to either On Password or On No Password 10 3 2 Configuration The Direct Connect Function is configured on a per port basis using the Port Configuration Menus P nn item 31 Direct Connect The following
160. ed in Section 15 This allows you to back up the configuration of your TSM RSM unit Availability Administrator Format u Enter K Send SSH Key Instructs the TSM RSM to provide you with a public SSH key for validation purposes This public key can then be provided to your SSH client in order to prevent the SSH client from warning you that the user is not recognized when you attempt to create an SSH connection For more information please refer to Section 10 2 Availability Administrator Format K k Enter Where k is a required argument which indicates the key type The k argument provides the following options 1 SSH1 2 SSH2 RSA 3 SSH2 DSA UL Unlock Port Invalid Access Lockout Manually cancels the TSM RSM s Invalid Access Lockout feature Normally when a series of failed login attempts are detected the Invalid Access Lockout feature can shut down the effected port or protocol for a user specified time period in order to prevent further access attempts When the UL command is invoked the TSM RSM will immediately unlock all ports and protocols that are currently in the locked state Availability Administrator Format UL Enter TELNET Outbound Telnet Creates an outbound Telnet connection Notes In order for the TELNET command to function Telnet SSH and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 5 5 In addition Telnet Access and Outbound Access must also b
161. eed as follows to connect ports and switch outlets 1 Review the Help Menu At the Text Interface command prompt type H and press Enter to display the Help Menu which provides a basic listing of all available TSM RSM commands Creating Connections Between Ports The TSM RSM can perform two different types of port connections Resident Connections and Third Party Connections a Resident Connection Your resident port issues a C command to connect to a second port i To connect your resident port to Port 3 type C 3 Enter While you are connected to Port 3 the unit will not recognize additional commands issued via your resident port However the unit will recognize a Resident Disconnect Sequence issued at either connected port ii Issue the Resident Disconnect Sequence Logoff Sequence type x press Ctrl and X at the same time Getting Started b Third Party Connection Your resident port issues a C command to create a connection between two other ports i To connect Port 3 to Port 4 type C 3 4 Enter ii While Ports 3 and 4 are connected your resident port will still recognize commands Type S Enter to display the Status Screen The STATUS column should now list Ports 3 and 4 as connected and the other ports as Free iii Issue a Third Party Disconnect command type D 3 Enter The unit will display the Are you Sure y n prompt Type y and press Enter to disconnect iv Type S Enter
162. een properly created and uploaded the warning message should no longer be displayed 14 3 Downloading the Server Private Key When configuring the TSM RSM s SSL encryption feature or setting up other security authentication features it is recommended to download and save the Server Private Key To download the Server Private Key access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows 1 2 Type N and press Enter to display the Network Parameters menu At the Network Parameters menu type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu Figure 14 1 a To download the Server Private Key from the TSM RSM unit make certain that SSL parameters have been defined as described in Section 14 1 then type 15 and press Enter and store the resulting key on your hard drive b To upload a previously saved Server Private Key to the TSM RSM unit make certain that SSL parameters have been defined as described in Section 14 1 then type 16 and press Enter and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu 14 4 Setting Up SSL Encryption 14 4 TLS Mode The TLS Mode parameter in the Web Access menu Text Interface Only allows the TLS Mode to be set to either TLSv1 or TLSv1 1 Although TLSv1 1 provides better security the default settings of most browsers do not support TLSv1 1 The default setting for this parameter is TLSv1 14 5
163. efining LDAP Group parameters make certain to save changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add LDAP Group button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message 5 9 8 2 Viewing LDAP Groups If you want to examine an existing LDAP group definition the View LDAP Groups function can be used to review the group s parameters 5 9 8 3 Modifying LDAP Groups If you want to modify an existing LDAP Group in order to change parameters the Modify LDAP Group function can be used to reconfigure group parameters To Modify an existing LDAP Group access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands Once you have accessed the Modify LDAP Group menu use the menu options to redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add LDAP Group menu as discussed in Section 5 9 8 1 Note After you have finished modifying LDAP Group parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Modify LDAP Group button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 5 9 8 4 Deleting LDAP Groups The Delete LDAP Group function is used to delete LDAP Groups that are no longer in use In order to delete L
164. el command access then the Default command will be applied to all switched plugs If you have accessed command mode using an account that has User level command access then the Default command will only be applied to the plugs allowed by your account The Default command is not available to ViewOnly level accounts Boot Priority When commands are applied to two or more plugs the Boot Priority parameter determines the order in which the plugs will be switched On The Plug that has been assigned a Boot Priority of 1 will always be switched on first followed by the plug that has been assigned the Boot Priority of 2 and so forth When you assign a boot priority to any given plug then all subsequent plugs will have their priority lowered by one For more information on the Boot Priority parameter please refer to Section 5 7 1 Default All plugs prioritized according to Plug Number 5 33 Basic Configuration 5 7 1 The Boot Priority Parameter Normally when an On or Reboot command is invoked RSM xRy Series units will switch on it s plugs in their default numeric order Although in many cases the default numeric order will work fine there are other cases where an individual device such as a router must be switched on first in order to support a second device that will be switched on later The Boot Priority Parameter simplifies the process of setting the order in which plugs are switched On by assigning a priority
165. ence Guide N6 Network Port Parameters IPv6 Displays a menu used to select IPv6 protocol parameters for the Network Port All functions provided by the N6 command are also available via the Web Browser Interface For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Availability Administrator Format N6 Enter NO Network Port Parameters Ethernet Port O IPv4 When configuring network parameters for TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet port the NO command is used to select IPv4 protocol parameters for Ethernet Port 0 For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Note This command is not available on TSM RSM units that do not include the optional secondary Ethernet port Availability Administrator Format NO Enter N1 Network Port Parameters Ethernet Port 1 IPv4 When configuring network parameters for TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet port the NO command is used to select IPv4 protocol parameters for Ethernet Port 1 For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Note 7his command is not available on TSM RSM units that do not include the optional secondary Ethernet port Availability Administrator Format N1 Enter N6 0 Network Port Parameters Ethernet Port 0 IPvG When configuring network parameters for TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet port the N6 0 command is used to select IPv6 protocol parameters for Ethernet P
166. ent Display Data Option in CSV format Download Current Metering Log in XML Format Downloads the Current Metering Log as determined by the current Display Data Option in XML format Erase Current Metering Log Clears all Current Metering Log data Note that when the Current Metering Log is erased the Power Metering Log will also be erased Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Current Metering link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the Current History link to display the Current Metering Log menu At the Current Metering Log menu you can display current history data as a graph or download or display the log in ASCII CSV or XML format Current Metering Log data can be displayed or downloaded for specific plug s or plug group s When the Current Metering Log is displayed as a graph a date range can also be selected allowing data to be displayed Live or for the previous Day Week Month or Year To save Current History data access command mode using an account that permits Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows Text Interface Type L and press Enter to show the Display Logs menu From the Display Logs menu key in the number for the desired option and then press Enter to display the Current History menu which allows you to either display the Current History log in ASCII format download and save in CSV or XML format or erase the Current History Lo
167. eration via SNMP 13 3 1 Viewing Users To view users issue a GET request on any of the user parameters for the index corresponding to the desired user 13 3 2 Adding Users For an empty index issue a SET request on the desired parameters Minimum requirement is a username and password to create a user all other parameters will be set to defaults if not specified To create the user issue a SET request on the userSubmit object 13 3 3 Modifying Users For the index corresponding to the user you wish to modify issue a SET request on the desired parameters to be modified Once complete issue a SET request on the userSubmit object 13 3 4 Deleting Users For the index corresponding to the user you wish to delete issue a SET request on the username with a blank string Once complete issue a SET request on the userSubmit object 13 3 Operation via SNMP 13 4 Plug Control via SNMP 13 4 1 Controlling Plugs Note Power Control features are not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM series units The power control functions described here are only available on RSM xRy Series units ON OFF BOOT and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plugs via SNMP Plugs are arranged in a table of N rows where N is the number of plugs in the system Plug parameters are described below e plugTable plugID String indicating the plug s ID e plugTable plugName String indicating the plug s user defined name plug
168. erature Log is enabled Note n RSM 8R8 CM series units the Temperature Log displayed as a part of the Current Metering Log as described in Section 8 6 5 5 5 5 Reading Downloading and Erasing Logs To read or download the status logs proceed as follows Text Interface Type L and press Enter to access the Display Log menu Key in the number for the desired option press Enter and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Web Browser Interface Move the cursor over the Logs link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears click on the desired Download or Display option To erase log data access command mode via the Text Interface using an account that permits Administrator level commands then type L and press Enter to access the Display Logs menu and proceed as follows Audit Log At the Display Logs menu key in the number for the Audit Log option and press Enter When the Audit Log menu appears key in the number for the Erase function press Enter and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Alarm Log At the Display Logs menu key in the number for the Alarm Log option and press Enter When the Alarm Log menu appears key in the number for the Erase function press Enter and follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Temperature Log At the Display Logs menu key in the number for the Temperature Log option and press Enter When the Temperatur
169. ered Notes In order for this alarm to function the No Dialtone Alarm must first be enabled and the No Dialtone Interval must be defined To enable the No Dialtone Alarm and define the No Dialtone Interval please refer to Section 5 8 2 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 and Section 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 and Section 12 The configuration menu for the No Dialtone Alarm allows the following parameters to be defined Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Note When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify Upon Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the No Dialtone Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter
170. erminal TeraTerm etc select the virtual COM port that was defined via your Serial Port Redirector software and then place a call as you normally would 5 54 Basic Configuration 5 9 3 IP Security The IP Security feature allows the TSM RSM to restrict unauthorized IPv4 or IPv6 format IP addresses from establishing inbound Telnet connections to the unit This allows you to grant Telnet access to only a specific group of IP addresses or block a particular IP address completely In the default state the TSM RSM accepts incoming IP connections from all hosts In the Text Interface IP Security parameters are defined via item 5 in the Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface these parameters are found by placing the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen and then clicking on the IP Security link in the resulting fly out menu The IP Security Function employs a TCP Wrapper program which allows the use of standard Linux operators wild cards and net mask pairs to create a host based access control list The IP Security configuration menus include hosts allow and hosts deny client lists Basically when setting up IP Security you must enter IP addresses for hosts that you wish to allow in the Allow list and addresses for hosts that you wish to deny in the Deny list Since Linux operators wild cards and net mask pairs are allowed these lists can indicate specific addresses
171. es can be created by the TSM RSM without the need to go to an outside service and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize the TSM RSM The principal disadvantage of Self Signed certificates is that when you access the TSM RSM command mode via the Web Browser Interface the browser will display a message which warns that the connection might be unsafe Note however that even though this message is displayed communication will still be encrypted and the message is merely a warning that the TSM RSM is not recognized and that you may not be connecting to the site that you intended Signed certificates must be created via an outside security service e g VeriSign Thawte etc and then uploaded to the TSM RSM unit to verify the user s identity In order to use Signed certificates you must contact an appropriate security service and set up your domain name server to recognize the name that you will assign to the TSM RSM unit e g service wti com Once a signed certificate has been created and uploaded to the TSM RSM you will then be able to access command mode without seeing the warning message that is normally displayed for Self Signed certificate access WEB ACCESS eth0 IPv4 HTTP 1 Enable On 2 Port 80 HTTPS Enable Off Port 443 Certificates Common Name State or Province Locality Country Email Address Organization Name Organizational Unit 15 Export Server Private Key C
172. es for web addresses DNS Server parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 5 The Web Browser Interface includes two separate fields that are allowed to define both an IPv4 protocol and IPv6 protocol format Primary NTP Address and Secondary NTP Adaress When the Primary NTP Address and Secondary NTP Adaress are defined via the Text Interface the TSM RSM will display a prompt that instructs the user to select IPv4 or IPv6 protocol The TSM RSM allows parameters for both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols to be defined and saved Secondary NTP Address Defines the IPv4 and or IPv6 protocol IP address or domain name for the secondary fallback NTP Server Default undefined Notes In order to use domain names for web addresses DNS Server parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 5 The Web Browser Interface includes two separate fields that are allowed to define both an IPv4 protocol and IPv6 protocol format Primary NTP Address and Secondary NTP Adaress When the Primary NTP Address and Secondary NTP Adaress are defined via the Text Interface the TSM RSM will display a prompt that instructs the user to select IPv4 or IPv6 protocol The TSM RSM allows parameters for both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols to be defined and saved NTP Timeout The amount of time in seconds that will elapse between each attempt to contact the NTP server When the initial attempt is unsuccessful the TSM RSM will ret
173. es generated by this alarm Default Alarm No Dial Tone 7 26 Alarm Configuration 7 10 The Lost Voltage Alarm Dual Power Inlet Units Only The Lost Voltage Line In Alarm can provide notification when one of the two power supplies available to a dual power inlet unit is interrupted Notes The Lost Voltage Line In alarm is only available on TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary power inlet The Lost Voltage Line In Alarm is not available on units that include only one power inlet The Lost Voltage Line In Alarm is not available on RSM 2R4 Series units The Lost Voltage Line In alarm will provide notification when one of the two available power supplies is lost or disconnected This alarm will not function if all input power to the unit is lost To provide notification when all input power is lost and restored please use the Power Cycle Alarm as described in Section 7 6 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 and Section 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 and Section 1
174. ess attempts at the serial SetUp Port If the number of invalid access attempts exceeds the defined Lockout Attempts trigger value the TSM RSM will lock the serial SetUp Port for the defined Lockout Duration period When Invalid Access Attempt monitoring for SSH Telnet or Web are selected a lockout will be triggered when the number of invalid access attempts during the defined Lockout Duration period exceeds the defined Hit Count for the protocol For example if the SSH Hit Count is set at 10 and the SSH Lockout Duration period is set at 120 seconds then if over 10 invalid access attempts are detected within 120 seconds the TSM RSM will then lock out the MAC address that generated the excessive attempts for 120 seconds Note that when an Invalid Access Lockout occurs you can either wait for the Lockout Duration period to elapse after which the TSM RSM will automatically reactivate the port or protocol or you can issue the UL command type UL and press Enter via the Text Interface to instantly unlock all TSM RSM logical network ports and communication protocols Notes When the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm has been enabled as described in Section 7 5 the TSM RSM can also provide notification via email Syslog Message and or SNMP trap whenever an Invalid Access Lockout occurs at the serial port f the Network Port has been locked by the Invalid Access Lockout feature it will still respond to the ping command provi
175. ess is selected SSH View Port Enable Text Interface Only Allows monitoring of Serial Port activity Default Off Note This item is defined via a submenu which is displayed when SSH Access is selected SSH View Port Bidirection Text Interface Only Allows monitoring of bidirectional Serial Port Activity Default Off Note This item is defined via a submenu which is displayed when SSH Access is selected 5 50 Basic Configuration HTTP Access Web Access Enables disables the Web Browser Interface When disabled users will not be allowed to contact the unit via the Web Browser Interface Default Off HTTP Port The TCP IP port number used for HTTP connections Default 80 HTTPS Access Enables disables HTTPS communication For instructions on setting up SSL encryption please refer to Section 14 Default Off HTTPS Port Selects the TCP IP port number that will be used for HTTPS connections Default 443 Notes In the Text Interface HTTP and HTTPS parameters reside in a separate submenu To enable and configure HTTP and HTTPS Access via the Text Interface access the Network Configuration Menu as described in Section 5 9 then type 23 press Enter and use the resulting submenu Figure 14 1 to select parameters as described in Section 14 When the Web Access parameter is accessed via the Text Interface the resulting submenu will also allow you to select SSL encryption par
176. etermines which outlet s will be rebooted when this IP address for this Ping No Answer operation does not respond to a Ping command Note that in the Text Interface Plug Access is defined via a separate submenu in the Web Browser Interface Plug Access is defined via a drop down menu which may be accessed by clicking on the plus sign in the Configure Plug Access field Default undefined Plug Group Access Determines which Plug Group s the Ping No Answer Reboot for this IP Address will be applied to Note that in the Text Interface Plug Group Access is defined via a separate submenu in the Web Browser Interface Plug Group Access is defined via a drop down menu which may be accessed by clicking on the plus sign Default undefined Reboot Options Ping Test Sends a test Ping command to the IP Address or domain name that has been defined for this Ping No Answer Reboot Notes In order for the Ping Test function to work properly your network and or firewall as well as the device at the target IP address must be configured to allow ping commands After you have finished defining or editing Ping No Answer Reboot parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add Ping No Answer button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the RSM xhy Series unit displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the
177. ext or Commands to Serial Ports Broadcasts text or commands to a user specified selection of TSM RSM Serial Ports Notes The Broadcast command will only be applied to Serial Ports that are configured for Any to Any Mode or Passive Mode Text or commands will not be broadcast to Modem Mode or Buffer Mode ports The Broadcast command will only be applied to Serial Ports that are not currently connected Text or commands will not be broadcast to connected Serial Ports Flow control handshake at target Serial Ports must be ready in order to receive text or commands The Broadcast command will not send text or commands to the Serial Port that initiated the command To exit Broadcast mode and send text or commands press Esc or type X Ctrl plus X Availability Administrator SuperUser Format BROADCAST port list Enter Where port list is a series of port numbers or names separated by spaces or commas Note that the port list argument can also include wild cards 17 13 Command Reference Guide 17 3 3 Configuration Commands F Set System Parameters Displays a menu used to define general system parameters for the TSM RSM unit All functions provided by the F command are also available via the Web Browser Interface For more information please refer to Section 5 3 Availability Administrator Format F Enter P Set Serial Port Parameters Displays a menu used to select parameters for the se
178. face Only When enabled the TSM RSM will put RADIUS debug information into Syslog Default Off OneTime Auth This feature should be enabled when using Two Factor Authentication with the One Time Password scheme enabled When enabled the One Time Password will be valid for the time specified under the OneTime Auth Timer parameter Default Off OneTime Auth Timer When the OneTime Auth parameter is enabled this parameter determines how long in minutes the One Time Password will be valid Default 5 Minutes Ping Test Ping RADIUS Servers Allows you to ping IP addresses or domain names that have been defined via the RADIUS Parameters menus in order to check that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered Notes In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping any user defined IP address in order to make certain that the IP address is responding 5 9 10 1 Dictionary Support for RADIUS The RADIUS dictionary file can allow you to define a user and assign command access rights and port access rights from a central location The RADIUS dictionary file dictionary wti can be found under the downloads tab on the product information page at wti com To install the dictionary file on your R
179. face provides three different methods for disconnecting ports the Resident Disconnect the Third Party Disconnect and the No Activity Timeout Providing the Timeout feature is enabled a No Activity Timeout will disconnect resident ports or third party ports Note The DTR Output option in the Port Parameters menu determines how DTR will react when the port disconnects DTR can be held low held high or pulsed and then held high 1 Resident Disconnect Disconnects your resident port from another port For example if you are communicating via Port 3 and Port 3 is connected to Port 4 a Resident Disconnect is used to disassociate the two ports The TSM RSM offers two different disconnect command formats the One Character Format and the Three Character Format for more information please refer to Section 5 8 2 Note The Resident Disconnect methods discussed here cannot be used to terminate a Telnet Direct Connection For more information please refer to Section 10 3 4 a One Character Default Enter the logoff character once Default Ctrl plus X It is not necessary to enter a carriage return before or after the logoff character b Three Characters Uses the Enter LLL Enter format where L is the logoff character For example if the logoff character is then the disconnect sequence is Enter Enter c Ifthe default disconnect command is not compatible with your application both the command format and log
180. fined Subnet Mask IPv4 Only Default 255 255 255 0 Subnet Prefix IPv6 Only Default undefined Gateway Address Default undefined DHCP Enables Disables Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol When enabled the TSM RSM will perform a DHCP request Note that in the Text Interface the MAC address for the TSM RSM is listed on the Network Status Screen Default Off Note Before configuring this feature via Telnet or Web make certain your DHCP server is set up to assign a known fixed IP address You will need this new IP address in order to reestablish a network connection with the TSMIRSM IP Security Provides access to a submenu that is used to enable and define the IP Security filter as described in Section 5 9 3 Default Off Note n the Web Interface IP Security parameters are defined via a seperate submenu which is accessed via a flyout menu under the Network Parametes Link on the left hand side of the screen Static Route Provides access to a submenu that is used to enable and define Static Route functions as described in Section 5 9 4 Default Off Note n the Web Interface Static Route parameters are defined via a seperate submenu which is accessed via a flyout menu under the Network Parametes Link on the left hand side of the screen DNS Servers Provides access to a submenu that is used to define Domain Name Server parameters as described in Section 5 9 5 Default undefined Note n th
181. five Il Table of Contents 1 IN OGUCHON 2 06000 cece wie rm ge rf xr E ee Re RR Em Rr ewe ee Bee 1 1 2 Unit Description 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee nhanh nn 2 1 2 1 TSM Series Front Panel 0 00 0 ccc ett eee ees 2 1 2 2 TSM Series Back Panel 00 e cect tte 2 2 2 3 RSM Series Front Panel 0 0 0 ccc eet nn 2 4 2 4 RSM Series Back Panel 00 e cette eee 2 5 2 5 RSM 16R16 Series Front Panel 00 0 0 tees 2 6 2 6 RSM 16R16 Series Back Panel 0 c cette eee 2 7 2 7 RSM 8R8 Series Front Panel 22 0 cece eee 2 8 2 8 RSM 8R8 Series Back Panel 00 0 e eee tte ee 2 10 2 9 RSM 2R4 Series Front Panel 02 0 0 cect tees 2 11 2 10 RSM 2R4 Back Panel 0 0 00 0c eects 2 12 2 11 Front Panel Button Functions eee 2 13 3 Getting Staned erresire eeu edge ee he fe oe e ee S aU Grad ek e AR ee 3 1 3 1 Apply Power to the TSM RSM 00 cece ren 3 1 3 2 Connect Your PC to the TSM RSM ssssssseseeee es 3 1 3 3 Communicating with the TSM RSM 0 00 0 cee tees 3 2 3 4 Connecting Ports and Switching Outlets ee eee 3 3 3 5 The WMU Enterprise Management Solution 0 0 0 eee eee eee 3 5 4 Hardware Installation 00 cee eee eee eee 4 1 4 1 Connecting the Power Supply Cables 00 0 esee eere 4 1 4 1 1 Connect the TSM RSM to Your Power Supply 000 00 ee eee 4 1 4
182. g Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Current Metering link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the desired action and then select graph format or display download the Current History in ASCII CSV or XML format The Status Screens 8 8 The Power Range Status Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Power Range Status Screen can be used to display power consumption readings over a user selected period of time for the RSM 8R8 CM series unit Note Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM series units or standard RSM series units To view the Power Range Status Screen access command mode using an account that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands and then proceed as follows Text Interface 1 Type L and press Enter to access the Display Logs menu From the Display Logs menu type 4 and press Enter to display the Power Metering Log menu 2 Power Metering Log Menu The Power Metering Log Menu offers three options a Display Data Option The Display Data Option determines whether the RSM 8R8 CM will display total current consumption for each branch Unit or current consumption for each outlet Plug The Power Metering Log Menu also allows you to either display Power Metering Data or download Power History Data b Display Power Metering Type 2 and press Enter The RSM 8R8 CM will display the Power Metering men
183. g Plug Groups Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Directory is not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units The Modify Plug Group function allows you to edit existing Plug Groups in order to change plug access rights Note that this function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands Once you have accessed the Modify Plug Group menu use the menu options to redefine parameters in the same manner that is used for the Add Plug Group menu as discussed in Section 5 6 2 Note After you have finished changing or editing parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Modify Plug Groups button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 5 6 4 Deleting Plug Groups Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Directory is not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units This function is used to delete individual Plug Groups Note that this function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands Note Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored 5 51 Bas
184. g a Direct Connect Session To terminate a Direct Connect session use the client program s disconnect feature The following will occur immediately upon a client initiated disconnect 1 The Network port is disconnected from the serial port 2 The Network session is terminated 3 The serial port is put to sleep Notes The Sequence Disconnect Command which is defined via the Port Configuration menus cannot be used to terminate a Direct Connection Any TSM RSM port that allows Administrator or SuperUser level commands can terminate a direct connection at another port by issuing the Text Interface s D command as described in Section 9 1 1 2 or via the Web Browser Interface s Port Control Screen as described in Section 9 1 1 3 Acknowledgment of data received by the TSM RSM network port does not automatically indicate that the data has been completely sent out the serial port Data may still be queued in TSM RSM buffers Any data queued at the time of a client initiated disconnect is discarded and is not passed to the attached device 10 7 Telnet amp SSH Functions 10 4 IP Aliasing In addition to the Direct Connect function described in Section 10 3 the TSM RSM also supports IP Aliasing which provides another method for connecting directly to any serial port on the unit without first accessing the command interface IP Aliasing allows you to assign an IP address to a TSM RSM serial port and then connect to that port direc
185. g functions are only available on RSM 8R8 CM Series units Inthe Text Interface power source configuration parameters are defined via the Power Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface power source configuration parameters are selected via the System Parameters menu The following Power Source Configuration parameters are available Voltage Calibration This option is used to calibrate the voltage readout on the RSM 8R8 CM front panel To calibrate the voltage first determine the approximate voltage and then select the Voltage Calibration option and key in the correct voltage In the Web Browser Interface the voltage is entered at the System Parameters menu in the Voltage Calibration field In the Text Interface the voltage is entered in a submenu of the System Parameters menu Default undefined Power Factor Can be any value from 0 1 to 1 00 Default 1 00 Power Efficiency Can be any whole number from 196 to 10096 Default 10096 5 21 Basic Configuration 5 4 User Accounts Each time you attempt to access command mode you will be prompted to enter a username login and password The username and password entered at login determine which serial port s and plug s you will be allowed to control and what type of commands you will be allowed to invoke Each username password combination is defined within a user account The TSM RSM allows up to 128 user accounts each account includes a usernam
186. g parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Lost Communication Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Alarm Configuration Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects lost communication with the a WTI device connected to one of the TSM RSM Serial Ports and then send a second notification when it determines that communication has been restored Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default 2 On Address 1 2 and 3 These paramete
187. ger is a function of the Telnet Hit Count parameter and the Telnet Lockout Duration Parameter Lockout Enable Enables Disables Invalid Access Lockout protection for Telnet connections Default Off Telnet Hit Count The number of invalid attempts that must occur during the length of time specified by the Telnet Lockout Duration period in order to trigger the Invalid Access Lockout feature for the Telnet protocol For example if the Telnet Hit Count parameter is set to 10 and the Telnet Lockout Duration parameter is set to 30 minutes then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for 30 minutes when over 10 invalid access attempts occur during any 30 minute long period Default 20 Telnet Lockout Duration This option selects both the length of time that a Telnet Lockout will remain in effect and also the time period over which invalid access attempts will be counted When a Telnet Lockout occurs the offending MAC address will be prevented from establishing a Telnet connection to the TSM RSM for the defined Telnet Lockout Duration period Default 2 Seconds Basic Configuration Web Protection Enables Disables and configures the Invalid Access function for Web connections When this item is enabled and excessive Invalid Access Attempts via Web are detected then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for the user defined Web Lockout Duration Period or until the UL command is issued Note that for
188. ggered SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 and Section 12 To configure the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Alarm you must access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Invalid Access Lockout alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Note When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled 7 17 Alarm Configuration Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon
189. h Mean Time Note that the Time Zone setting will function differently depending upon whether or not the NTP feature is enabled and properly configured Default GMT No DST NTP Enabled The Time Zone setting is used to adjust the Greenwich Mean Time value received from the NTP server in order to determine the precise local time for the selected time zone NTP Disabled If disabled or if the unit cannot access the NTP server then status screens and activity logs will list the selected Time Zone and Real Time Clock value but will not apply the correction factor to the Real Time Clock value NTP Enable When enabled the TSM RSM will contact an NTP server defined via the NTP Address prompts once a day and update its clock based on the NTP server time and selected Time Zone Default Off Notes The TSM RSM will also contact the NTP server and update the time whenever you change NTP parameters To cause TSM RSM to immediately contact the NTP server at any time make certain that the NTP feature is enabled and configured then type F and press Enter When the System Parameters menu appears press Esc The TSM RSM will save parameters and then attempt to contact the server as specified by currently defined NTP parameters Basic Configuration Primary NTP Address Defines the IPv4 and or IPv6 protocol IP address or domain name for the primary NTP server Default undefined Notes In order to use domain nam
190. hat is higher than the Alarm Set Threshold Alarm Clear Threshold Determines how low the temperature must drop in order for the Alarm condition to be cancelled and for Auto Recovery if enabled to occur For more information on Load Shedding and Auto Recovery for the Over Temperature Alarm please refer to Section 7 2 1 Initial Threshold Default 100 F or 38 C Critical Threshold Default 110 F or 43 C Note The System Parameters menu is used to set the temperature format for the TSM RSM unit to either Fahrenheit or Celsius as described in Section 5 3 Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that the temperature has exceeded the trigger value and then send a second notification when it determines that the temperature has fallen below the trigger value Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email ala
191. he Serial Port Parameters menu for the desired port as described in Section 5 8 Set the following a Port Mode Make certain that the Port Mode is set to Buffer Mode b SNMP Trap Level Set the SNMP Trap Level to the desired value The SNMP Trap Level determines how much data must accumulate in a given port buffer in order to generate and SNMP Trap Notes e tis only necessary to set the SNMP Trap Level when you wish to generate SNMP Traps to notify you when data has accumulated in a port buffer If you only wish to generate SNMP Traps to notify you when an alarm has been triggered it is not necessary to set the SNMP Trap Level e f you only wish to generate SNMP Traps to notify you when an Over Temperature Alarm Lost Communications Alarm Ping No Answer Alarm Invalid Access Alarm or Power Cycle Alarm has been triggered it is not necessary to set the Buffer Threshold parameter 12 1 SNMP Traps 3 SNMP Trap Parameters Access the SNMP Trap Parameters Menu as described in Section 5 9 7 Set the following a SNMP Managers 1 and 2 The address es that will receive SNMP Traps that are generated by one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7 Consult your network administrator to determine the IP address es for the SNMP Manager s then use the Network Parameters menu to set the IP address for each SNMP Manager Note that it is not necessary to define both SNMP Managers Notes To enable the SNMP Trap feature you must define
192. he Setup Port or Network Port Unless specifically restricted by the IP Security Function all users will be allowed to access command mode and all commands will be immediately accepted without the requirement to enter a password 2 Status Screen Suppressed The plug status screen will not be automatically displayed after commands are successfully executed Note however that the S command can still be invoked to display the status screen as needed 3 Sure Prompt Suppressed All commands are executed without prompting for user confirmation 4 Error Messages Suppressed Most error messages will be suppressed Note however that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked using invalid formats or arguments All other status display and configuration commands will still function as normal 5 20 Basic Configuration 5 5 6 Power Configuration RSM 8R8 CM Series Units Only The Power Configuration menu allows you to adjust power measurements in order to obtain a more accurate determination of how much real power is being used by devices connected to the RSM 8R8 CM Series unit Real Power is determined by the following equation Voltage Amps Power Factor Real Power Power Efficiency To define Power Configuration parameters access the command mode using an account that permits access to Administrator level commands and then activate the System Parameters Menu Notes e Current and Power Meterin
193. he Text Interface also known as the Command Line Interface or CLI consists of a series of simple ASCII text menus which allow you to set options and define parameters by entering the number for the desired option using your keyboard and then typing in the value for that option Since the Web Browser Interface and Telnet accessibility are both disabled in the default state you will need to use the Text Interface to contact the unit via Local PC or SSH connection when setting up the unit for the first time After you have accessed command mode using the Text Interface you can then enable Web Access and Telnet Access if desired in order to allow future communication with the unit via Web Browser or Telnet You will not be able to contact the unit via Web Browser or Telnet until you have enabled those options Once Telnet Access is enabled you will then be able to use the Text Interface to communicate with the TSM RSM via local PC Telnet or SSH connection You can also use the Text Interface to access command mode via an external modem installed at one of the TSM RSM s serial ports In order to use the Text Interface your installation must include Access via Network The TSM RSM must be connected to your TCP IP Network and your PC must include a communications program such as HyperTerminal Access via Modem A phone line must be connected to the TSM RSM s internal modem In addition your PC must include a communications program
194. he Web Browser Interface the Voltage Calibration parameter Power Factor parameter and Power Efficiency parameter are defined via the System Parameters Menu In the Text Interface these parameters reside in a separate submenu which is accessed via the Power Configuration option For more information on Power Configuration please refer to Section 5 3 6 EnergyWise Configuration RSM xRy Series Units Only Defines parameters that are needed in order for an RSM xRy Series unit to serve as an element in a Cisco EnergyWise network This item allows the following parameters to be defined Note The EnergyWise Configuration options are only available on RSM xRy Series units The EnergyWise Configuration options are note available on standard TSM or standard RSM units that do not include switched power outlets In the Web Interface EnergyWise configuration options are accessed via the flyout menu under General Parameters Enable Enables disables the RSM xRy Series unit s ability to particapate in a Cisco Energywise network Default Off Domain The Energywise Domain Name up to eighty characters long Default Undefined Secret A password that is used to authenticate each element in a Cisco Energywise network The Secret parameter can be up to eighty characters long Default Undefined Asset Tag Allows a descriptive tag or tracking number to be assigned to the RSM TSM unit Once defined the Asset Tag can be displ
195. he connected ports The only exception is the Resident Disconnect Sequence Default x Ctrl plus X 17 1 Command Reference Guide 2 Command Summary Function Command Syntax Command Access Level Admin SuperUser User ViewOnly Display Port and Plug Status S Enter xe xe xe xo Port Diagnostics SD Enter xe xe xe xe Port Parameters Who W n Enter xe xe xe xe Plug Group Status 0 SG Enter xe xe xe xe Network Status SN Enter X X X X Network Configuration Summary RN Enter X X X X IP Alias Status SA Enter X X xe xe Alarm Status AS alarm Enter X Current MeteringO M Enter X X Xo Xo View Connection with Echo V n Enter X X View Connection without Echo VE n Enter X X Help Menu H Enter X X X X Log Functions 1 Enter X X Site ID Unit Information 3 Enter X X X X Exit Command Mode X Enter X X X X Connect Local Remote C n n Enter X X xo Disconnect Ports D n Nn Enter X X Read Buffer R n Enter X X X Erase Buffer s E n Enter X X X Boot Plug n 0 BOOT n Y Enter e X X X Turn Plug n On 0 ON n Y Enter e X X X Turn Plug n Off 9 OFF n Y Enter O X X X Default All Plugs 0 DPL Y Enter O X X X Send Parameter File U Enter X Send SSH Keys K n Enter X Unlock Invalid Access UL
196. he name or number of the desired outlet S s s Displays On Off status for two or more specific outlets where s is the number or name of each desired outlet A plus sign is entered between each outlet number or name S s s Displays On Off status for a range of outlets where s is the number or name of the outlet at the beginning and end of the range of desired outlets A colon is entered between the two outlet numbers or names that mark the beginning of the range and the end of the range The Status Screens 8 5 The Plug Group Status Screen On RSM xRy Series units the Plug Group Status screen can be displayed to show the configuration details and On Off status for user defined Plug Groups Notes The Plug Group Status Screen is not available on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units When the Plug Group Status Screen is viewed by an account with Administrator or SuperUser command access all plugs and plug groups can be shown When the Plug Status Screen is viewed by an account with User or ViewOnly command access then the unit will only display the plugs and plug groups that are allowed by that account The procedure for defining parameters for individual plugs is described in Section 5 7 The procedure for defining Plug Groups is described in Section 5 6 In order to display the Plug Group Status screen you must first define at least one Plug Group as described in Section 5 6 To display the P
197. he number for the line connected to the TSM RSM s Phone Line port Getting Started Username Password Prompt A message will be displayed which prompts you to enter your username Login and password The default username is super all lower case no quotes and the default password is also super If a valid username and password are entered the TSM RSM will display either the Main Menu Web Browser Interface or the Port Status Screen SSH Telnet or Modem Notes The default Username is super The default Password is super f a Login Banner has been defined as described in Section 5 3 then a banner page will appear before the command interface is displayed The Login Banner can be used to display legal warnings or other information Review Help Menu If you are communicating with the TSM RSM via the text interface SSH Telnet or Modem type H and press Enter to display the Help Menu which lists all available TSM RSM commands Note that the Help Menu is not available via the Web Browser Interface 8 4 Connecting Ports and Switching Outlets Although both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface allow you to select configuration parameters the Text Interface is always used when invoking commands to connect ports If you have previously accessed command mode via the Web Browser Interface exit command mode log out then re enter command mode using the Text Interface as described in Section 3 3 Proc
198. hen attempting to access the TSM RSM from a node that is not on the same subnet please refer to Section 5 9 for further configuration instructions When connecting only a single network cable to a TSM RSM unit that includes two Ethernet ports make certain to connect to Port ETHO the upper Ethernet Port 1 Access Command Mode The TSM RSM includes two separate user interfaces the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface The Text Interface is available via Local PC SSH Client Telnet or Modem and can be used to both configure the TSM RSM and create connections between ports The Web Browser interface is only available via TCP IP network and can be used to configure the unit but cannot create connections between ports a Via Local PC Start your communications program and then press Enter b Via SSH Client Start your SSH client enter the default IP address 192 168 168 168 for the TSM RSM and invoke the connect command c Via Web Browser Make certain that Web Browser access is enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 Start your JavaScript enabled Web Browser enter the default IPv4 format TSM RSM IP address 192 169 168 168 in the Web Browser address bar and then press Enter d Via Telnet Make certain that Telnet access is enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 Start your Telnet client and enter the TSM RSM s default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 e Via Modem Use your communications program to dial t
199. ia the Text Inteface 8 14 1 The Audit Log The Audit Log provides a record of most command activity at the TSM RSM unit including port connections and disconnections login and logout activity Note however that the Audit Log does not include user information regarding access to configuration menus or status screens Note n RSM xhy Series units the Audit Log will also include power switching operations 8 14 2 The Alarm Log The Alarm Log provides a record of all events that were initiated by a TSM RSM alarm function 8 14 5 The Temperature Log The temperature log provides a record of TSM RSM temperature readings in reverse chronological order with the most recent events appearing at the top of the list Note The Temperature Log is not available on RSM 8R8 CM series units instead temperature readings are listed in the Current History Log 9 Operation As discussed in Section 5 1 the TSM RSM offers two separate command interfaces the Web Browser Interface and the Text Interface Both interfaces offer essentially the same options and features and in most cases parameters defined via the Web Browser Interface will also apply when communicating via the Text Interface and vice versa 9 1 Connecting and Disconnecting Serial Ports Text Interface The Text Interface can be used to create connections between TSM RSM serial ports This allows you to access the console port of a connected device or allow connecte
200. ial ports that have been configured for Buffer Mode as described in Section 5 8 2 In order for the Buffer Threshold Alarm to function you must first define the Buffer Threshold value for each desired serial port as described in Section 5 8 2 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 f the Buffer Threshold Alarm is not enabled the TSM RSM can still send SNMP Traps to notify you when the amount of accumulated data at a buffer mode port exceeds the Buffer Threshold value providing that SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined as described in Section 5 9 7 To configure the Buffer Threshold Alarm access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands and then set the Port Mode for the desired Serial Port to Buffer Mode and define the Buffer Threshold value for the port as described in Section 5 8 2 The Buffer Threshold Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When D
201. ic Configuration 5 7 Defining Plug Parameters Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Parameters Menu is not present on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units The Plug Parameters Menu is used to define Plug Names boot sequence delay times and Power Up Default values for each of the RSM xRy Series Unit s Switched AC Outlets Note that this function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands To define Plug Parameters via the Text Interface type PL and then press Enter to display the Plug Parameters Menu To define plug parameters via the Web Browser Interface click on the Plug Parameters link on the left hand side of the screen to display the Plug Parameters Menu The Plug Parameters Menu allows you to define the following parameters Plug Name Up to 16 Characters Defaults for Plugs 1 through 8 Outlet1 Outlet8 Note Plug Names cannot begin with a number dash underscore character forward slash character or backslash character and cannot include non printable characters spaces asterisks colons the plus symbol or quotation marks Boot Seq Delay When more than one plug is switched On or a reboot cycle is initiated the Boot Sequence delay determines how much time will elapse before the next plug is switched On When the Boot Sequence Delay is applied the TSM RSM
202. ice at this address fails to respond to the Ping command the Ping No Answer Alarm can provide user notification Default undefined Notes In order to use Domain Names you must first define DNS parameters as described in Section 5 9 5 The target IP Address can be entered in either IPv4 format or IPv6 format In the text interface a the IP Address or Domain Name submenu is used to select either IPv4 or IPv6 protocol In the Web Browser Interface a drop down menu is used to select the desired protocol Protocol Allows definition of an IPv4 format IP Address or an IPv6 format IP Address Note that if desired both an IPv4 and an IPv6 format IP Address may be defined Default IPv4 Note n the Text Interface the protocol is specified via the IP Address or Domain Name prompt Ping Interval Determines how often the Ping command will be sent to the selected IP Address The Ping Interval can be any whole number from 1 to 3 600 seconds Default 60 Seconds Note f ihe Ping Interval is set lower than 20 seconds it is recommended to define the IP Address or Domain Name parameter using an IP Address rather than a Domain Name This ensures more reliable results in the event that the Domain Name Server is unavailable Interval After Failed Ping Determines how often the Ping command will be sent after a previous Ping command receives no response Default 10 Seconds Ping Delay After PNA Action Determines how long the T
203. ificate to the outside security service Refer to the security service s web page for further instructions 14 5 Setting Up SSL Encryption Upload the Signed Certificate to the TSM RSM After the signed certificate is returned from the security service return to the Web Access menu 8 Access the TSM RSM command mode via the Text Interface using an account that permits Administrator level commands as described previously then type N and press Enter to display the Network Parameters menu and then type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu b From the Web Access menu type 14 and press Enter Import CRT to begin the upload process At the CRT Server Key submenu type 1 and press Enter to choose Upload Server Key c Use your communications program to send the binary format Signed Certificate to the TSM RSM unit When the upload is complete press Escape to exit from the CRT Server Key submenu d After you exit from the CRT Server Key submenu press Escape several times until you have exited from the Network Parameters menu and the Saving Configuration message is displayed After the configuration has been saved test the signed certificate by accessing the TSM RSM via the Web Browser Interface using an HTTPS connection For example if the common name has been defined as service wti com then you would enter https service wti com in your web browser s address field If the Signed Certificate has b
204. ify that a valid IP address has been entered In order for the Ping Test feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands 4 Syslog Daemon In order to capture messages sent by the TSM RSM a computer must be running a Syslog Daemon set to UDP Port 514 at the IP address es specified in Step 3 above Once the Syslog Address is defined Syslog messages will be generated whenever one of the alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered The SNMP Trap function allows the TSM RSM to send Alarm Notification messages to two different SNMP managers each time one of the Alarms discussed in Section 7 is triggered Note e The SNMP feature cannot be configured via the SNMP Manager SNMP reading ability is limited to the System Group e The SNMP feature includes the ability to be polled by an SNMP Manager Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined SNMP Traps will be sent each time an Alarm is triggered and or when a Buffer Mode serial port reaches the user defined Buffer Threshold value For more information on Alarm Configuration please refer to Section 7 12 1 Configuration To configure the SNMP Trap function proceed as follows 1 Access command mode using an account that permits access to Administrator level commands Serial Port Parameters If you wish to generate SNMP Traps that will notify you when a Buffer Mode Port buffer reaches the user defined Buffer Threshold access t
205. ill not check the Deny list 8 Text Interface Note the number for the first empty field in the Allow list then type that number at the command prompt press Enter and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu Web Browser Interface Place the cursor in the first empty field in the parameters menu then key in the desired IP Address operators wild cards and or net mask pairs 3 DenyList Enter the IP Address es for the clients that you wish to deny Note that if the client s IP Address is not found in the Deny List that client will be allowed to connect Use the same procedure for entering IP Addresses described in Step 2 above 5 56 Basic Configuration 5 9 3 2 Linux Operators and Wild Cards In addition to merely entering a specific IP address or partial IP address in the Allow or Deny list you may also use any standard Linux operator or wild card In most cases the only operator used is EXCEPT and the only wild card used is ALL but more experienced Linux users may note that other operators and wild cards may also be used EXCEPT This operator creates an exception in either the allow list or deny list For example if the Allow list includes a line which reads 192 EXCEPT 192 255 255 6 then all IP address that begin with 192 will be allowed except 192 255 255 6 providing that this address appears in the Deny list ALL The ALL wild card indicates that all IP Addresses should be allowe
206. in order to use the WMU software the firmware version for the TSM RSM must be at least v6 23 or higher When upgrading older TSM RSM units that feature pre v6 23 firmware it is recommended to use the WTI Firmware Upgrade Utility A zip file that contains the installation files and other documentation for the WTI Firmware Upgrade Utility can be downloaded from WTI s FTP server located at ftp wtiftp wti com pub TechSupport Firmware Upgrade Utility Please refer to the documentation included in the zip file for further instructions 16 2 The Upgrade Firmware Function Alternate Method The Upgrade Firmware function provides an alternative method for updating the TSM RSM firmware Updates can be uploaded via FTP or SFTP protocols Notes The FTP SFTP servers can only be started via the Text Interface All other ports will remain active during the firmware upgrade procedure If the upgrade includes new parameters or features not included in the previous firmware version these new parameters will be set to their default values The upgrade procedure will require approximately 15 minutes 1 Obtain the update file Firmware modifications can either be mailed to the customer or downloaded from WTI Place the upgrade CDR in your disk drive or copy the file to your hard drive 2 Access Text Interface command mode via Serial Port Telnet or SSH client session using a username password and port that permit Administrator level comma
207. in units that include the optional secondary power inlet To provide notification when only one power input line is lost or disconnected please use the Lost Voltage Line In Alarm as described in Section 7 10 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Email communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via Syslog Message Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 and Section 1 1 n order for the TSM RSM to provide alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 and Section 12 To configure the Power Cycle Alarm you must access the TSM RSM command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Power Cycle Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Note When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms
208. ine Alarm if present Defaults Initial Alarms 7096 Critical Alarms 8096 Resend Delay Determines how long the RSM 8R8 CM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM will first send notification when it detects that current consumption has exceeded the trigger value and then send a second notification when it determines that the current consumption has fallen below the trigger value Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously defined then the text under the parameters will list the current user selected email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages ge
209. isabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes When an alarm is generated to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Buffer Threshold Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Resend Delay Determines how long the TSM RSM will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes 7 20 Alarm Configuration Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the TSM RSM will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled for the Buffer Threshold Alarm the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that the amount of data stored in the buffer for a given serial port has exceeded the user defined Buffer Threshold value and then send a second notification when it determines that the amount of data in the buffer has fallen below the Buffer Threshold value Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this
210. itialization String Defines a command string that can be sent to initialize a modem to settings required by your application Default AT amp C1 amp D2S0 1 amp B1 amp H1 amp R2 Modem Hang Up String Although the TSM RSM will pulse the DTR line to hang up an attached modem the Hang Up string is often useful for controlling modems that do not use the DTR line Default undefined Reset No Dialtone Interval Determines how often the Reset String will be sent to the modem at this port and also sets the trigger value for the No Dialtone Alarm For more information on the No Dialtone Alarm please refer to Section 7 9 Default 15 Minutes No Dialtone Alarm Enable When this item is On the No Dialtone Alarm can be enabled as described in Section 7 9 When the No Dialtone Alarm is enabled the TSM RSM will monitor the phone line connected to the modem installed at this port and generate an alarm when no dialtone is detected for the duration of the currently defined Reset No Dial Tone Interval value Default Off Note When communicating with the TSM RSM via modem these parameters will not be changed until after you exit command mode and disconnect Modem PPP Mode Allows data that is normally sent via ethernet to be sent via phone line When Modem PPP Mode is selected the following modem related parameters will be available Reset String Redefines the modem reset string The Reset String can be sent prior to the In
211. itialization string Default ATZ lnitialization String Defines a command string that is used to initialize the modem to settings required for PPP communication Default ATQOV1E1SO0 0 amp C1 amp D2 Hang Up String Although the TSM RSM will pulse the DTR line to hang up an attached modem the Hang Up string is often useful for controlling modems that do not use the DTR line Default undefined Reset No Dialtone Interval Determines how often the Reset String will be sent to the modem at this port and also sets the trigger value for the No Dialtone Alarm For more information on the No Dialtone Alarm please refer to Section 7 9 Default 15 Minutes No Dialtone Alarm Enable When this item is On the No Dialtone Alarm can be enabled as described in Section 7 9 When the No Dialtone Alarm is enabled the TSM RSM will monitor the phone line connected to the modem installed at this port and generate an alarm when no dialtone is detected for the duration of the currently defined Reset No Dial Tone Interval value Default Off 5 40 Basic Configuration Periodic Reset Location The IP address or URL for the website that will be used to keep the PPP connection alive when not in use The TSM RSM will regularly ping the selected IP address or URL in order to keep the connection alive Default undefined Notes In order to select a domain name as the Periodic Reset Location you must first define the Domain
212. ive Mode Allows communication with a local PC and permits access to command mode When Any to Any Mode or Passive Mode are selected the following mode specific parameter can also be defined DTR Output Determines how DTR will react when the port disconnects DTR can be held low held high or pulsed for 0 5 seconds and then held high Default Pulse Buffer Mode When the Buffer Mode is selected the following mode specific parameters may be defined Date Time Stamp Enables disables the Time Date stamp for buffered data at this port When enabled the TSM RSM will add a time date stamp whenever five seconds elapse between data items received Default On Buffer Connect When enabled the TSM RSM will continue to Buffer captured data while you are connected to this Buffer Mode port Default Off DTR Output Determines how DTR will react when the port disconnects DTR can be held low held high or pulsed for 0 5 seconds and then held high Default Pulse 5 39 Basic Configuration Modem Mode Permits access to command mode and simplifies connection to an external modem Modem Mode ports can perform all functions normally available in Any to Any Mode but Modem Mode also allows definition of a Hang Up String Reset String and Initialization String Modem Reset String Redefines the modem reset string The Reset String can be sent prior to the Initialization string Default ATZ gt Modem In
213. k on the Alias Status link When defining an IP Alias for a TSM RSM unit that includes the optional secondary Ethernet port note that the IP Alias is a shared parameter The IP Alias that is definied for Ethernet Port O will always be the same as the IP Alias that is defined for Ethernet Port 1 and vice versa For dual Ethernet TSM RSM units you can only define one IP Alias and that IP Alias will be assigned to both Ethernet Port 0 and Ethernet Port 1 5 44 Basic Configuration 5 8 5 Copying Parameters to Several Serial Ports Text Interface Only If you are configuring the TSM RSM via the Text Interface the CP Copy Parameters command can be used to select identical parameters for one or more serial ports When the CP command Copy Port Parameters is invoked the unit will display a menu which allows you to select parameters and copy them to all or several TSM RSM serial ports The Copy Port Parameters menu can set all parameters for the specified port s or define only a select group of parameters for a specific group of ports Notes The CP command is not available via the Web Browser Interface The CP command will not copy parameters to the Network Port e The CP command is only available to accounts and ports that permit Administrator level commands The CP command cannot be used to set Port 1 to Passive or Buffer Mode or to disable the Administrator Mode at Port 1 To copy parameters to all or several RS 232
214. ks of Western Telematic Inc All other product names mentioned in this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Western Telematic Inc Such information and descriptions may not be copied disseminated or distributed without the express written consent of Western Telematic Inc Copyright Western Telematic Inc 2015 September 2015 Part Number 14023 Revision O Trademarks and Copyrights Used in this Manual Cisco and EnergyWise are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems Inc Hyperterminal is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Portions copyright Hilgraeve Inc Teraterm is a copyright of Ayera Technologies Inc BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In Motion Limited JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc Telnet is a trademark of Telnet Communications Inc Thawte is a trademark of Thawte Inc VeriSign is a registered trademark of VeriSign Incorporated All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are acknowledged to be the property of the trademark owners Apx 12
215. lback Security feature is configured to use either of the On Callback options then this user will be granted immediate access to command mode via modem If the Callback Phone Number is not defined for a given user and the Callback Security feature is configured to use the On Callback ONLY option then this user will not be able to access command mode via Modem e When using the On Callback With Password Prompt option it is important to remember that accounts that do not include a callback phone number will be allowed to access command mode without callback verification Authorization Keys This item can be used to assign an SSH Authorization Key to the user account view assigned authorization keys or delete assigned authorization keys When a valid authorization key is assigned to a given user that user will be able to access TSM RSM command mode without entering a password When assigning an authorization key the TSM RSM offers the option to define a name for the key and upload a key from the user s server Note After you have finished selecting or editing account parameters make certain to save the new account information before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add User button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 5 27 Basic Configuration 5 5 5
216. lease refer to Section 5 9 i Via SSH Client Start your SSH client and enter the TSM RSM s IP Address Invoke the connect command wait for the connect message then proceed to Step 2 ii Via Telnet Start your Telnet Client and then Telnet to the TSM RSM s IP Address Wait for the connect message then proceed to Step 2 c Via Modem Use your communications program to dial the number for the phone line that you have connected to the TSM RSM s internal modem port 2 Login Password Prompt A message will be displayed which prompts you to enter a username login name and password The default username is super all lower case no quotes and the default password is also super Note f a Login Banner has been defined as described in Section 5 3 then a banner page will appear before the command prompt is displayed The Login Banner can be used to display legal warnings or other information Basic Configuration 5 1 2 The Web Browser Interface The Web Browser Interface consists of a series of web forms which can be used to select configuration parameters and perform reboot operations by clicking on radio buttons and or entering text into designated fields Note n order to use the Web Browser Interface Web Access must first be enabled via the Text Interface Network Parameters Menu N the TSM RSM must be connected to a TCP IP network and your PC must be equipped with a JavaScript enabled web browser 1 Start your
217. led Reboot function The RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which lists all defined parameters for the selected Scheduled Reboot action 6 2 3 Modifying Scheduled Reboots After you have defined a Scheduled Reboot you can edit the configuration of the Reboot action using the Modify Scheduled Reboot feature In order to modify the configuration of an existing Scheduled Reboot action you must access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Scheduled Reboot menu s View Modify Scheduled Reboot function The RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which allows you to modify parameters for the selected Scheduled Reboot action Note that this screen functions identically to the Add Scheduled Reboot menu as discussed in Section 6 2 1 6 2 4 Deleting Scheduled Reboots After you have defined one or more Scheduled Reboot actions you can delete Reboot actions that are no longer needed using the Delete Scheduled Reboot feature In order to delete an existing Scheduled Reboot access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level commands and then use the Scheduled Reboot menu s Delete Scheduled Reboot function 7 Alarm Configuration When properly configured the TSM RSM can monitor temperature readings ping command response and a number of other factors at network installation sites and log this information for future review When any monitored condition exceed
218. ll pulse DTR to the modem The unit will then send the user defined modem command strings to make certain the modem is properly disconnected and reinitialized The Internal Modem Port is always configured for Modem Mode Note that RSM 2R4 Series units do not include an Internal Modem Port When an external modem is installed at a TSM RSM port other ports can use the modem for calling out To call out invoke the C command to connect to the port then access the modem as you normally would 9 1 5 Modem PPP Mode The Modem PPP Mode allows data that is normally sent via ethernet to be sent via phone line Modem PPP Mode ports can perform all functions normally available in Any to Any Mode but Modem PPP Mode also allows definition of a Hang Up String Reset String Initialization String Periodic Reset Location IP Address and other communication related parameters The Modem PPP Mode is not available at the Network Port When a call is received the unit will prompt the caller to enter a username and password The TSM RSM allows three attempts to enter a valid username and password If a valid username and password is not entered within three attempts or if the user does not respond to the login prompt within 30 seconds the modem will disconnect Operation 9 2 Controlling Power Web Browser Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Se
219. llback Security submenu which is accessed via the General Parameters menu located on the left hand side of the screen Front Panel Buttons This item can be used to disable all front panel button functions Default On Modem Phone Number IP Address If the TSM RSM unit includes an internal modem this parameter can be used to record the phone number for the modem In cases where the TSM RSM application includes a cellular modem the IP address for the cellular modem can be entered via this parameter Default undefined Basic Configuration Scripting Options Provides access to parameters that are used to set up the TSM RSM unit for running various scripts as described in Section 5 3 5 Notes The functions provided by the Scripting Options menu are intended for use in applications where scripts are employed to control TSM RSM operation Improper use of Scripting Options menu functions can cause the TSM RSM unit to become unresponsive Prior to attempting to use the functions provided by the Scripting Options menu please contact WTI Technical Support as described in Appendix D in this User s Guide In the Text Interface the Scripting Options submenu is accessed via item 12 To access the Scripting Options parameters via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the General Parameters link wait for the flyout menu to appear then click on the Scripting Options link Power Configuration RSM 8R8 CM Series Only In t
220. local access to command mode 5 38 Basic Configuration Command Echo Enables or Disables command echo at this Serial Port When disabled commands that are sent to the Serial Port will still be invoked but the actual keystrokes will not be displayed on your monitor Default On Accept Break Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the attached device When enabled breaks received at the port will be passed to any port that this port is connected to When disabled breaks will be refused at this port Default On Port Mode Parameters Port Name Allows you to assign a name to the Serial Port Defaults Serial Ports 1 and above undefined Internal Modem Port if present MODEM Port Mode The operation mode for this port Defaults Serial Port 1 Any to Any Mode Serial Ports 2 and above Passive Internal Modem Port if present Modem Mode Notes Passive and Buffer Modes are not available at Serial Port 1 the Setup Port The Port Mode for the Internal Modem Port if present can only be set to Modem Mode Depending on the Port Mode selected the TSM RSM will also display the additional prompts listed below In the Text Interface these parameters are accessible via a submenu which will only be active when the appropriate port mode is selected In the Web Browser Interface fields will be grayed out unless the corresponding port mode is selected Any to Any Mode and Pass
221. long data is allowed to accumulate in the buffer before being sent TCP Hold Write Enable Enables disables the TCP Hold Write function Default Off TCP Hold Write Duration Determines the maximum amount of time in 40 msec intervals that data will be allowed to accumulate before transmission Default 2 TCP Hold Write Buffer Size Determines the size of the TCP Hold Write Buffer When the amount of accumulated data reaches the currently defined Hold Write Buffer Size buffered data will be sent Default 512 Characters Voltage Loss Delay Options RSM xRy Series Units with Dual Power Inlets Only Determines how RSM xRy Series Units with Dual Power Inlets will react when power to one inlet is lost The Voltage Loss Delay Options allow the unit to automatically turn off outlets and delay the Lost Voltage Alarm when power to one inlet is lost Turn Plugs Off Enable When enabled after power to one inlet is lost the unit will wait for the defined Voltage Loss Delay period and then switch Off all outlets on the branch that was supported by the inlet that has lost power Default Off Voltage Loss Delay Determines how long the unit will pause before generating a Lost Voltage Alarm and switching off the outlets after power to one of the inlets is lost Default 12 Seconds Reverse DNS Determines the manner in which ARP requests are handled When enabled On the unit will check an external DNS in order to resolve do
222. lue and or when current consumption falls below a user defined Low value This allows you to define a normal current range for each Plug Group allowing the Plug Current Alarm to be triggered whenever total current consumption for the Plug Group strays outside of this range Default undefined Note n order to define Plug Group Thresholds you must first define at least one Plug Group as described in Section 5 6 Plug Off Low Alarm Allows you to configure the Low current alarm to suppress triggering when an outlet is purposely switched Off When this feature is On the RSM 8R8 CM will generate a Low alarm whenever current drops below the Low threshold value even if the current drop is due to an outlet being purposely switched Off When this feature is Off the RSM 8R8 CM will not generate a Low alarm due to a current drop caused by an outlet being switched Off Default On Notes The Plug Off Low Alarm feature will also be applied to Plug Groups When the Plug Off Low Alarm feature is enabled On the RSM 8R8 CM will always generate a Low current alarm when current drops below the Low threshold value even when the current drop was caused by one or more outlets in the Plug Group being purposely switched Off When the Plug Off Low Alarm feature is disabled Off the RSM 8R8 CM will not generate a Low current Alarm when a current drop is caused by all outlets in the Plug Group being purposely switched Off
223. lug Group Status Screen via the Text Interface type SG and then press Enter To display the Plug Group Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface click on the Plug Group Status link and then select the desired Plug Group from the resulting subment and click on the Get Plug Group Status button Note The SNMP Index item Text Interface Only lists the permanent reference number that the RSM xRy assigns to each Plug Group The SNMP Index number allows MIB commands to be addressed to a specific Plug Group The SNMP Index number will not change when other Plug Groups are deleted or created 8 4 The Status Screens 8 6 The Current Metering Status Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Current Metering Status screen is primarily intended to be used to display up to date readings for Amps Watts Voltage and temperature for the RSM 8R8 CM Series unit To view the Current Metering Log screen proceed as follows Note Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM units or standard RSM units In addition to displaying the Current Metering Status Screen the M command can also be used to display current voltage and power readings for each switched outlet on RSM 8R8 CM Series units When the M command is invoked the command line can also include arguments that display the status of individual outlets specific pairs of outlets or a range of outlets M M M M M M sts S S Displays the
224. lug Groups first access command mode via the Web Browser Interface see Section 5 1 Click on the Plug Group Control link on the left hand side of the screen to display the Plug Group Control Screen When the Plug Group Control Screen appears click the down arrow in the Action column for the desired Plug Group s then select the desired switching option from the dropdown menu and click on the Confirm Plug Actions button When the Confirm Plug Group Actions button is pressed the RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which lists the selected action s and asks for confirmation before proceeding To implement the selected plug group action s click on the Execute Plug Group Actions button The RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which indicates that a switching operation is in progress then display the Plug Status screen when the command is complete At that time the Status Screen will list the updated On Off status of each plug Notes When switching and reboot operations are initiated Boot Sequence Delay times and user defined Plug Priority values will be applied as described in Section 5 7 If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already in the process of being switched or rebooted by a previous command then the new command will be placed in a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands When the Plug Group Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits Administrator
225. ly used by each port The TSM RSM uses buffer memory in two different ways depending on the user selected port mode Any to Any Passive and Modem Mode Ports When two ports are communicating at dissimilar baud rates the buffer memory prevents data overflow at the slower port Buffer Mode Ports Stores data received from connected devices The user issues a Read Buffer command R from an Any to Any or Modem Mode port to retrieve data If the Status Screen indicates an accumulation of data the E Erase Buffer command can be invoked to clear the buffer Note When a Buffer Mode port is reconfigured as an Any to Any Passive or Modem Mode port any data stored in the buffer prior to changing the port mode will be lost Operation 9 1 4 Modem Mode The Modem Mode provides features specifically related to modem communication A Modem Mode Port can perform all functions normally available in Any to Any Mode The Modem Mode is available at all TSM RSM ports except the Network Port When a call is received the unit will prompt the caller to enter a username and password The TSM RSM allows three attempts to enter a valid username and password If a valid username and password is not entered within three attempts or if the user does not respond to the login prompt within 30 seconds the modem will disconnect Notes When a Modem Mode port exits command mode or the DCD line is lost while command mode is active the TSM RSM wi
226. m all configuration menus and the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration menu and the cursor returns to the command prompt If newly defined configuration parameters are not saved prior to exiting from command mode then the TSM RSM will revert to the previously saved configuration after you exit from command mode 5 10 1 Restore Configuration If you make a mistake while configuring the TSM RSM unit and wish to return to the previously saved parameters the Text Interface s Reboot System command 1I offers the option to reinitialize the unit using previously backed up parameters This allows you to reset the unit to previously saved parameters even after you have changed parameters and saved them Notes e The TSM RSM will automatically backup saved parameters once a day shortly after Midnight This configuration backup file will contain only the most recently saved TSM RSM parameters and will be overwritten by the next night s daily backup When the I command is invoked a submenu will be displayed which offers several Reboot options Option 4 is used to restore the configuration backup file The dates shown next to Option 4 indicates the date that you last changed and saved unit parameters f the daily automatic configuration backup has been triggered since the configuration error was made and the previously saved configuration has been overwritten by newer incorrect parameters then this function will not be able to re
227. main names When disabled Off the unit will not check an external DNS when resolving domain names Default On Port 1 Mode Override In order to ensure local access to TSM RSM command functions normally Serial Port 1 can only be configured as a Passive Mode Port or Any to Any Mode Port When the Port 1 Mode Override option is enabled Serial Port 1 can be configured as a Buffer Mode Port Modem Mode Port or Modem PPP Port Default Off Note Configuring Serial Port 1 as a Buffer Mode Port can lead to a situation where local access to TSM RSM command functions is not available via serial port Reboot Unit Web Interface Only Restarts the TSM RSM unit s operating system To restart the TSM RSM unit via the text interface invoke the I command as described in Section 17 Note The Reboot function that is provided via the Scripting Options menu and I command does not switch off power to the TSM RSM unit The reboot function only restarts the TSM RSM s operating system Basic Configuration 5 3 5 1 Automated Mode The Automated Mode allows RSM xRy series units to execute switching and reboot commands without displaying menus or generating response messages Automated Mode is designed to allow the RSM to be controlled by a device which can generate commands to control power switching functions without human intervention When Automated Mode is enabled power switching and reboot commands are executed without a confirmation pro
228. mand will be applied to all plugs For example to reboot all allowed plugs type BooT Enter Command Queues RSM xRy Series Units Only If a switching or reboot command is directed to a plug that is already being switched by a previous command then the new command will be placed into a queue until the plug is ready to receive additional commands Busy Plugs RSM xRy Series Units Only If the Status column in the Plug Status Screen includes an asterisk this means that the plug is currently busy and is in the process of completing a previously issued command If a new command is issued to a busy plug then the new command will placed into a queue to be executed later Plug Name Wild Card RSM xRy Series Units Only It is not always necessary to enter the entire plug name Plug names can be abbreviated in command lines by entering the first character s of the name followed by an asterisk For example a plug named SERVER can be specified as S Note however that this command would also be applied to any other plug name that begins with an S Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt When any command that normally requires confirmation is invoked the Y option can be included to override the Command Confirmation Sure prompt For example to reboot Plug 4 without displaying the Sure prompt type BooT 4 Y Enter Connected Ports When two ports are connected most RSM commands will not be recognized by either of t
229. me TSM series units include an optional secondary IEC 320 C 14 power inlet This allows connection to a secondary power source in power redundancy applications Q Power On Off Switch Master Power Switch Note The Power On Off Switch is not present on TSM series units that include the optional secondary power inlet 2 2 Unit Description RS232 Serial Ports For connection to console ports on target devices Standard RJ45 connectors configured as DTE ports The RS232 ports are similar to a serial port on a PC When connecting a modem use a standard serial cable When connecting a PC or other DTE device please refer to Section 4 5 and Appendix B and Appendix C TSM 8 series units include 8 Serial Ports TSM 24 series units include 24 Serial Ports TSM 40 series units include 40 Serial Ports Network Port s An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 10 100Base T TCP IP network Note that the TSM features a default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 This allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address Note that the Network Port also includes two small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity For more information on Network Port configuration please refer to Section 5 9 Notes Some TSM series units include an optional secondary RJ45 Ethernet port This allows the TSM to be connected to both a primary network and secondary network When two Network Ports are present the t
230. menu as described in Section 5 3 When the TSM RSM is reset to factory defaults all user defined configuration parameters will be cleared and the default super user account will also be restored When the TSM RSM is reinitialized all ports will be disconnected During the reboot procedure all port activity LEDs will flash once 1 Reboot Operating System Keep User Defined Parameters a Press and hold the CLEAR or RESET button for five seconds and then release b The TSM RSM operating system will reboot all user defined parameters will be retained 2 Reboot Operating System Reset All Parameters to Factory Defaults a Simultaneously press both the SET or DEFAULT button and the CLEAR or RESET button hold them for five seconds and then release b The TSM RSM operating system will reboot all user defined parameters will be reset to factory default settings Note The RDY Indicator will continue to blink for about 45 seconds while parameters are being erased and keys are rebuilt The RDY Indicator will then stop blinking during the reboot 2 13 3 Getting Started This section describes a simplified installation procedure for the TSM RSM hardware which will allow you to communicate with the unit in order to demonstrate basic features and check for proper operation Note that this Quick Start procedure does not provide a detailed description of unit configuration or discuss advanced operating features i
231. mmands 5 6 2 Adding Plug Groups Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Directory is not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units The Add Plug Group to Directory option allows you to create new Plug Groups and assign plug access rights to each group Note that the Add Plug Group function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Add Plug Group Menu can be used to define the following parameters for each new account Plug Group Name Assigns a name to the Plug Group Default undefined Plug Access Determines which plugs this Plug Group will be allowed to control Default undefined Notes Inthe Text Interface Plug Access is configured by selecting item 2 and then selecting the desired plugs from the resulting submenu In the Web Browser Interface Plug Access is configured by selecting the desired plugs from a list of all plugs in the Add Plug Group menu After you have finished defining or editing Plug Group parameters make certain to save the changes before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add Plug Group button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 5 30 Basic Configuration 5 6 3 Modifyin
232. mpt and without command response messages the only reply to these commands is the command prompt which is re displayed when each command is completed Although Automated Mode can be enabled using either the Web Browser Interface or Text Interface Automated Mode is designed primarily for users who wish to send ASCII commands to the RSM without operator intervention and therefore does not specifically apply to the Web Browser Interface When Automated Mode is enabled the Web Browser Interface can still be used to invoke switching and reboot commands Notes When the Automated Mode is enabled password prompts will not be displayed at login and you will be able to access Administrator Level command functions including the configuration menus and control plugs without entering a password If you need to enable the Automated Mode but want to restrict network access to configuration menus it is strongly recommended to enable and configure the IP Security Function as described in Section 5 9 3 The Automated Mode is not available on TSM RSM units that do not include switched outlets To enable disable the Automated Mode go to the System Parameters menu see Section 5 3 and then set the Automated Mode option to On When Automated Mode is enabled TSM RSM functions will change as follows 1 All Password Security Suppressed When a user attempts to access command mode the password prompt will not be displayed at either t
233. n you must first define at least one target IP address To define target IP addresses for the Ping No Answer Alarm access command mode using an account that permits Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows Text Interface At the command prompt type PNA and then press Enter to display the Ping No Answer menu Type 2 and press Enter to add a target IP address for the Ping No Answer Alarm Web Browser Interface Click the Ping No Answer Configuration link located on the left hand side of the screen to display the Ping No Answer Configuration Menu Click on the Add Ping No Answer link to define a target IP address es for the Ping No Answer Alarm Alarm Configuration Note that both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface include menu options that allow you to either View previously defined Ping No Answer IP Addresses add new Ping No Answer Addresses Modify previously defined Ping No Answer IP Addresses or delete previously defined Ping No Anser IP addresses After one or more Ping No Answer IP Addresses have been defined as described in this section the Ping No Answer Alarm function can then be enabled and configured as described in Section 7 4 1 2 Up to 54 Ping No Answer IP Addresses can be defined The Add Ping No Answer menu is used to define the following parameters for each new Ping No Answer IP Address IP Address or Domain Name The IP address or Domain Name for the target device When the dev
234. n your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Ping Test feature the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping the currently defined Syslog Addresses in order to make certain that the IP addresses are responding 5 51 Basic Configuration SNMP Access Displays a submenu which is used to define SNMP Access parameters as described in Section 5 9 6 Note 7o define SNMP Access parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select SNMP Parameters SNMP Trap Parameters Displays a submenu which is used to define SNMP Trap parameters as described in Section 5 9 7 Note 7o define SNMP Trap parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select SNMP Traps LDAP Displays a submenu which is used to define LDAP parameters as described in Section 5 9 8 Note 7o define LDAP parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the flyout menu appears select LDAP Parameters TACACS Displays a submenu which is used to define TACACS parameters as described in Section 5 9 9 Note 7o define TACACS parameters via the Web Browser place the cursor over th
235. n allows you to create new accounts Note that the Add User function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands The Add User Menu can define the following parameters for each new account Username Up to 32 characters long and cannot include non printable characters Duplicate usernames are not allowed Default undefined Password Five to 16 characters long and cannot include non printable characters Note that passwords are case sensitive Default undefined Access Level Determines which commands this account will be allowed to access This option can set the access level for this account to Administrator SuperUser User or ViewOnly For more information on Command Access Levels please refer to Section 5 4 1 and Section 17 2 Default User 5 25 Basic Configuration Port Access Determines which TSM RSM Serial Ports this account will be allowed to access Defaults Administrator amp SuperUser All Ports On User and ViewOnly undefined Notes Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all Serial Ports ViewOnly accounts are allowed to display the status of Serial Ports but are limited to the ports specified by the account ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to create connections between ports The Port Access parameter is also used to grant or deny user access to the internal modem port Plug
236. n asterisk X Optional Suppresses the SURE Y N prompt Example To clear the buffer for Port 3 access the Command Mode using an account that provides access to Port 3 and then type E 3 Enter BOOT Initiate Boot Cycle Initiates a boot cycle at the selected plug s or Plug Group s When a Boot cycle is performed an RSM xRy Series unit will first switch the selected plug s Off then pause for the user defined Boot Sequence Delay Period then switch the plug s back on The BOOT command can also be entered as BO Notes This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The Boot command is only available on RSM xRy Series units When the BOOT command is used to reboot more than one plug the Boot Sequence Delay Periods will be applied as described in Section 5 7 When this command is invoked in Administrator Mode or SuperUser Mode it can be applied to all plugs and Plug Groups on the unit When this command is invoked in User Mode it can only be applied to the plugs and or Plug Groups that have been enabled for your account Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format BOOT n Y Enter or Bo n Enter Where n The number or name of the plug s or Plug Group s that you intend to boot To apply the command to several plugs enter a plus sign between each plug number To apply the command to a range of plugs enter the numbers for the first and last plugs in
237. n be compiled for use with your SNMP client 13 2 SNMPv3 Authentication and Encryption The major limitations of SNMPv2 were the failure to include proper username password login credentials v2 only used a password type of login i e community name and the exclusion of encryption for data moving over the internet SNMPv3 addresses both of these shortcomings For SNMPv3 the TSM RSM supports two forms of Authentication Privacy Auth noPriv which requires a username password but does not encrypt data going over the internet and Auth Priv which requires a username password AND encrypts the data going over the internet using DES AES is not supported at this time For the Password protocol the TSM RSM supports either MD5 or SHA1 13 1 Operation via SNMP 13 3 Configuration via SNMP TSM RSM User accounts can be viewed created modified and deleted via SNMP User accounts are arranged in a table of 128 rows and indexed 1 128 User account parameters as seen through the SNMP are summarized below userTable userName 32 character username userTable userPasswd 16 character password userTable userAccessLevel Account access level 0 View Access 1 User Access 2 Superuser Access 3 Administrator Access userTable userPlugAccess RSM xRy Series Units Only A string of up to 16 characters with one character for each of the 16 possible plugs on the RSM xRy unit A 0 indicates that the account does no
238. n detail For more information please refer to the remainder of this User s Guide 3 1 Apply Power to the TSM RSM Refer to the safety precautions listed at the beginning of this User s Guide and then connect the unit to an appropriate power source Connect the power supply cable to the unit s power inlet snap the Cable Keeper into place and then connect the cable to an appropriate power supply Please refer to the power rating label on the unit concerning power requirements and maximum load Note that some TSM RSM series units feature two power inlets and RSM 16R16 series units include four power inlets When power is applied to the TSM RSM the ON LED on the instrument front panel should light and the RDY LED should begin to flash within 90 seconds This indicates that the unit is ready to receive commands 3 2 Connect Your PC to the TSM RSM The TSM RSM can either be controlled by a local PC Serial Port controlled via modem or controlled via TCP IP network In order to select parameters connect ports or control outlets commands are issued to the TSM RSM via either the Network Port Modem Port or Serial Setup Port Network Port Connect the your 10Base T or 100Base T network interface to the TSM RSM 10 100Base T Network Port Serial Port Use the supplied Ethernet cable and RJ45 to DB 9 adapter to connect your PC COM port to Serial Port 1 the System SetUp Port For a description of the Serial Port Interface please refer to
239. nabled and the temperature exceeds the user defined Alarm Set Threshold For example if the Plug State is set to Off then the selected plugs plug groups will be switched Off when the Alarm Set Threshold is exceeded Default Off Auto Recovery Enables Disables the Auto Recovery feature When both Load Shedding and Auto Recovery are enabled the RSM xRy Series unit will return plugs to their former On Off state after the temperature falls below the Alarm Clear Threshold value This allows the RSM xRy Series unit to undo the effects of the Load Shedding feature after the temperature has returned to an acceptable level Default Off Alarm Configuration Plug Access Determines which Plug s will be switched when the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered For example if plugs 1 2 and 3 are selected then these plugs will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold Default undefined Notes Inthe Text Interface Plug Access is configured by typing 4 pressing Enter and then selecting the desired Plug s from the resulting submenu Inthe Web Browser Interface Plug Access is configured by clicking on the plus symbol in the Configure Plug Access field to display the drop down menu and then selecting the desired Plug s from the drop down menu Plug Group Access Determines which Plug Group s will be switched when the temperat
240. nd mode using an account that permits Administrator commands In both the Text Interface and the Web Browser Interface the user configuration menu offers the following functions View User Directory Displays currently defined parameters for any TSM RSM user account as described in Section 5 5 1 Add Username Creates new user accounts and allows you to assign a username password command level access rights and callback number as described in Section 5 5 2 Modify User Directory This option is used to edit or change account information as described in Section 5 5 3 Delete User Clears user accounts as described in Section 5 5 4 Note After you have finished selecting or editing account parameters make certain to save the new account information before proceeding In the Web Browser Interface click on the Add User button to save parameters in the Text Interface press the Esc key several times until the TSM RSM displays the Saving Configuration message and the cursor returns to the command prompt 5 5 1 Viewing User Accounts The View User Directory option allows you to view details about each account The View User option will not display actual passwords and instead the password field will read defined The View User Accounts function is only available when you have accessed command mode using a password that permits Administrator Level commands 5 5 2 Adding User Accounts The Add Username optio
241. nds pu X B 16 1 Upgrading TSM RSM Firmware When the command prompt appears type UF and then press Enter The TSM RSM will display a screen which offers the following options a Start FTP SFTP Servers Only Do NOT default parameters To proceed with the upgrade while retaining user defined parameters type 1 and press Enter All existing parameter settings will be restored when the upgrade is complete b Start FTP SFTP Servers amp Default Keep IP parameters amp SSH Keys To proceed with the upgrade and default al user defined parameters except for the IP Parameters and SSH Keys type 2 and press Enter When the upgrade is complete all parameter settings except the IP Parameters and SSH Keys will be reset to factory default values C Start FTP SFTP Servers amp Default Default ALL parameters To proceed with the upgrade and reset parameters to default settings type 3 and press Enter When the upgrade is complete all parameters will be set to default values d Start FTP SFTP Servers for Slip Stream Upgrade This option will upgrade only the WTI Management Utility without updating the TSM RSM s operating firmware To update the WTI Management Utility only type 4 and press Enter Note that after any of the above options is sele
242. ne would be WTI Plug Access 0101 Note Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power Control parameters are not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units WTI Group Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines which plug group s the user will be allowed to access The argument for this command includes a character for each defined plug group with the first character in the string being used to represent the first plug group defined and the last character in the string representing the last plug group defined The following options are available for each plug group 0 Off Deny Access 1 On Allow Access For example to allow access to the first three defined plug groups out of a total of six defined plug groups the command line would be WTI Group Access 111000 Note Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power Control parameters are not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units Example The following command could be used to set the command access level to User allow access to Serial Ports 1 3 5 and 7 tom Auth Type Local User Password tom1 Login Service Telnet Login TCP Port Telnet User Name HARRY tom WTI Super 1 WTI Port Access 10101010 5 71 Basic Configuration 5 9 11 Email Messaging Parameters The Email Messaging menu is used to define parameters for email messages tha
243. nerated by the alarm Defaults Alarm Over Current Initial or Alarm Over Current Critical Alarm Configuration Load Shedding Provides access to a submenu which is used to configure and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Current Alarm When Load Shedding is enabled and properly configured the RSM 8R8 CM will switch user selected plugs On or Off whenever the current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM can also return these user selected plugs to their prior status when current load falls below the Alarm Clear Threshold value For more information on the Load Shedding Feature and Auto Recovery please refer to Section 7 1 1 7 1 1 Over Current Alarms Load Shedding and Auto Recovery The Load Shedding feature is used to switch specific user defined non essential plugs On or Off whenever current load exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value This allows the RSM 8R8 CM to automatically shut Off plugs in order to reduce current load when the load approaches user defined critical levels When the Auto Recovery feature is enabled the RSM 8R8 CM can also automatically undo the effects of the Load Shedding feature when current load again falls to a user defined non critical level Together the Load Shedding and Auto Recovery features allow the RSM 8R8 CM to shut off power to non essential devices when the current load is too high and then switch those same non
244. nique Therefore parameters defined for the Critical Threshold Alarm will not be applied to the Initial Threshold Alarm and vice versa Both the Over Temperature Initial Threshold alarm and the Over Temperature Critical Threshold alarm offer the following parameters Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all TSM RSM alarms For example if the Lost Communication Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other TSM RSM alarms will also be enabled Alarm Configuration Alarm Set Threshold The trigger level for this alarm When temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold the TSM RSM can send an alarm if enabled and or begin Load Shedding if enabled For more information on Load Shedding please refer to Section 7 2 1 Initial Threshold Default 110 F or 43 C Critical Threshold Default 120 F or 49 C Note The Alarm Set Threshold value must be greater than the Alarm Clear Threshold value The TSM RSM will not allow you to define an Alarm Clear Threshold value t
245. nnection and power switching commands and view all status screens but can only apply commands to the ports and outlets that they have been specifically granted access to Users are not allowed to view configuration menus or change configuration parameters ViewOnly Accounts with ViewOnly access are allowed to view Status Menus but are not allowed to invoke port connection and power switching commands and cannot view configurations menus or change parameters ViewOnly accounts can display the Port Plug Status screens but can only view the status of ports and plugs that are allowed by the account Section 17 2 summarizes command access for all four access levels 5 22 Basic Configuration In the default state the TSM RSM includes one predefined account that provides access to Administrator commands and allows to control of all of the TSM RSM s serial ports and switched power outlets The default username for this account is super lowercase no quotation marks and the password for the account is also super Notes In order to ensure security it is recommended that when initially setting up the unit a new user account with Administrator access should be created and the default super account should then be deleted e f the TSM RSM is reset to default parameters all user accounts will be cleared and the default super account will be restored 5 4 2 Granting Serial Port Access Each account can be granted access to
246. not allow access to command mode Passive Mode Ports can be connected by accessing command mode from a free Any to Any or Modem Mode port and invoking the C command Passive Mode is not available at Port 1 the Network Port or the Internal Modem Port and is the default mode at Ports 2 and above Buffer Mode Allows storage of data received from connected devices Collected data can be retrieved by accessing command mode from a free Any to Any or Modem Mode Port and issuing the Read Buffer R Command Furthermore Buffer Mode ports can also be configured to support the Syslog and SNMP Trap features discussed in Sections 12 and 13 The Buffer Mode is not available at Port 1 the Network Port or the Internal Modem Port Modem Mode Allows communication between connected ports permits access to command mode and simplifies connection to an external modem Modem Mode ports can perform all functions normally available in Any to Any Mode but Modem Mode also allows definition of a Hang Up String Reset String and Initialization String and other modem related parameters The Modem Mode is not available at the Network Port and is the default mode for the Internal Modem Port if present Modem PPP Mode Allows data that is normally sent via ethernet to be sent via phone line Modem PPP Mode ports can perform all functions normally available in Any to Any Mode but Modem PPP Mode also allows definition of a Hang Up String Reset String Initialization S
247. nout and signal directions for the target interface Apx 4 Appendices B 3 RSM Series DB9M Serial Ports When connecting Devices to standard RSM Series DB9M Serial Console Ports please refer to Figure B 2 and the table below Target Device End Adapter Cable Adapter WTI Device End RJ Serial Console None Required RJ45 Straight Cable DX9F DTE RJ WTI RSM Series Ports Cisco Routers RJX 7 7 Feet Snap Adapter DB9M DTE Juniper Routers and Other Network Devices with RJ45 Serial Console Port RJX 15 15 Feet RJX 25 25 Feet RJX 50 50 Feet None Required DX9F DTE RJC Rollover Cable for None Required Cisco Sun DB9M Serial Console DX9F NULL RJ RJ45 Straight Cable DX9F DTE RJ Ports Linux PC or Liinux Snap Adapter RJX 7 7 ft Snap Adapter Laptop WTI RSM Series Units WTI MPC SEries Units and Other Devices with a DB9M Serial RJX 15 15 ft RJX 25 25 ft RJX 50 50 ft None Required DB9 Null Cable None Required Console Port DB25F Serial Console DX25M DTE RJ RJ45 Straight Cable DX9F NULL RJ Ports Terminal DTE Snap Adapter RJX 7 7 ft Snap Adapter and Other Devices with DB25F Serial Console Port RJX 15 15 ft RJX 25 25 ft RJX 50 50 ft None Required DB25M to DB9F Null Cable None Required Serial Console Port Apx 5 Appendix C Connecting Devices to RJ45 Serial Ports This section describes the cables and adapters th
248. nsport Failure Fallback Local is enabled but the unit will only fallback to it s own internal user directory when it cannot contact the TACACS Server Authentication Port The port number for the TACACS function Default 49 Default User Access When enabled allows TACACS users to access the unit without first defining a TACACS user account on the TSM RSM When new TACACS users access the unit they will inherit the default Access Level Port Access and Service Access defined via the items listed below Default On Enable Enables disables the Default User Access function Default On Access Level Determines the default Access Level setting for new TACACS users This option can set the default access level for new TACACS users to Administrator SuperUser User or ViewOnly For more information please refer to Section 5 4 1 and Section 17 2 Default User 5 66 Basic Configuration Port Access Determines the default Port Access setting for new TACACS users The Port Access setting determines which serial ports each account will be allowed to control Defaults Administrator and SuperUser All Ports On User undefined ViewOnly undefined Notes Administrator and SuperUser level accounts always have access to all ports User level accounts will only have access to ports specified via the Port Access parameter ViewOnly level can view the connection status of permitted serial ports b
249. nu item that is used to select IPv4 protocol or IPv6 protocol Protocol Web Interface Only Allows definition of an IPv4 format IP Address or an IPv6 format IP Address Note that if desired both an IPv4 and an IPv6 format IP Address may be defined Default IPv4 Ping Interval Determines how often the Ping command will be sent to the selected IP Address The Ping Interval can be any whole number from 1 to 3 600 seconds Default 60 Seconds Note f ihe Ping Interval is set lower than 20 seconds it is recommended to define the IP Address or Domain Name parameter using an IP Address rather than a Domain Name This ensures more reliable results in the event that the Domain Name Server is unavailable Reboot Options Interval After Failed Ping Determines how often the Ping command will be sent after a previous Ping command receives no response Default 10 Seconds Ping Delay After PNA Action Determines how long the RSM xRy Series unit will wait to send additional Ping commands after a Ping No Answer Reboot has been initiated Typically this option is used to allow time for a device to fully wake up after a Ping No Answer Reboot before attempting to Ping the device again Default 15 Minutes Consecutive Failures Determines how many consecutive failures of the Ping command must be detected in order to initiate a Ping No Answer Reboot For example if this value is set to 3 then after three consecutive Ping failure
250. o Figure 2 13 RSM 8R8 2 Back Panel 2 8 RSM 8R8 Series Back Panel As shown in Figures 2 12 and 2 13 the RSM 8R8 series back panel includes the following components D Power Inlets IEC 320 C20 inlet s for connection to your power supply Note that Some RSM 8R8 series units include an optional secondary power inlet This allows the RSM 8R8 to connected to both a primary power supply and a secondary power supply for power redundancy applications Q Switched Outlets Eight AC Outlets that can be switched On Off or rebooted in response to user commands RSM 8R8 1 Series Eight 8 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets e RSM 8R8 2 Series Eight 8 each IEC320 C13 Outlets 2 10 Unit Description RSM 2R4 Remote Site Manager Power Control Figure 2 14 RSM 2R4 Series Front Panel 2 9 RSM 2R4 Series Front Panel As shown in Figure 2 14 the RSM 2R4 front panel includes the following components D Network Port An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 10 100Base T TCP IP network Note that the RSM 2R4 features a default IPv4 format IP address and a default IPv6 format IP address 192 168 168 168 This allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address Note that the Network Port also includes two small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity For more information on Network Port configuration please refer to Section 5 9 Note RSM 2R4 Series units are not available with an internal mo
251. o enter a password before the connection is established Off Break on Raw Disconnect The port will send a break character when a Raw Socket connection with the port is terminated Note that this feature Will work with both the No Password and Password options as described in Section 10 3 2 In the default state this feature is disabled no break character is sent when a Raw Socket connection is terminated Note f On Password is selected and Administrator level commands are disabled at the Network Port then only accounts that do not permit Administrator level commands will be allowed to establish a direct connection via the Network Port If Administrator level commands are disabled at a given port then that port will not allow access by accounts that permit Administrator level commands When the Port Parameters menu is accessed via the Text Interface and the Direct Connect feature is enabled the menu also lists both Direct Connect port numbers for this port port numbers are not listed in the Web Browser Interface Telnet Port The Telnet port number employed to create a Direct Connection to this port using standard Telnet protocol SSH Port When Direct Connect Item 31 is set at On Password this line will display the Telnet port number used to create a Direct Connection to this port using SSH protocol For more information please refer to Section 10 Raw Port The Telnet port number that is used to create a
252. off character can be redefined via the Port Configuration menus as described in Section 5 8 2 2 Third Party Disconnect Administrator and SuperUser Mode Only The D command is issued from your resident port to disconnect two other ports For example if your Resident Port is Port 1 a Third Party Disconnect is used to disconnect Ports 3 and 4 Note The Third Party Disconnect method can be used to terminate a Telnet Direct Connection For more information please refer to Section 10 3 4 a The D command uses the format D xx Enter where xx is the number of either of the connected ports that you wish to disconnect b Third Party Remote Disconnects can only be performed by accounts that permit Administrator or SuperUser level commands c The D command can specify both connected ports or either of the two ports For example if Port 1 is your resident port any of the following commands can be used to disconnect Port 3 from Port 4 D 3 4 Enter or D 3 Enter or D 4 Enter 9 4 Operation d The D command can also disconnect a remote user from the Network Port This is useful in cases where a user has unsuccessfully disconnected via Telnet and you can t wait for the TSM RSM to timeout in order to free up the TCP port To disconnect a TCP port type D Nn and then press Enter Where Nn is one of the TSM RSW s logical TCP ports e g D N2 Enter No Activity Timeout Providing the Timeout feature is enabled
253. og will list data for each individual RSM 8R8 CM outlet as well as the total for all RSM 8R8 CM outlets The Status Screens 8 10 The Port Diagnostics Screen The Port Diagnostics Screen provides more detailed information about each port To display the Port Diagnostics Screen access the Text Interface command mode and type SD Enter Note The Port Diagnostics Screen is only available via the Text Interface When the SD command is invoked by an Administrator or SuperUser level account the Port Diagnostics Screen will display the status of all ports If the SD command is invoked by a User or ViewOnly level account then the Port Diagnostics Screen will only display the status of the ports that are specifically allowed by that account 8 11 Alias Status Screen The Alias Status Screen lists user defined IP aliases for each serial port along with the user defined name of each port and the currently selected Direct Connect setting for each serial port To display the Alias Status Screen via the Text Interface type SA and press Enter To display the Alias Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the Port Status link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the flyout menu to appear and then select Alias Status from the flyout menu When the Alias Status Screen is displayed by an Administrator or SuperUser level account the screen will display the status of all ports If Alias Status Screen is di
254. old Alarms at this port If set to 0 zero then SNMP Traps are disabled at this port If the Buffer Threshold parameter is set at a value of one 1 or greater then the Buffer Threshold function is enabled and traps will be sent to the SNMP Managers whenever the buffer for this port reaches the specified threshold level For more information please refer to Section 12 When a Buffer Threshold value is defined this also allows the Buffer Threshold Alarm to be employed as described in Section 7 7 Default Off 0 Note e The Buffer Threshold feature only applies to Buffer Mode Ports This option is not available to Serial Port 1 This is because Port 1 is reserved as a SetUp Port and cannot be configured as a Buffer Mode Port 5 43 Basic Configuration IP Alias Assignes an IP address of your choice to the serial port When an IP address is assigned to the serial port this essentially allows users to create a direct connection to the serial port without first entering a password Default undefined Notes The IP Alias feature is only available when the Direct Connect feature is set to On Password or On No Password To display the assigned IP Alias for each serial port via the Text Interface type SA and press Enter To display the IP Alias status via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the Port Status link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the flyout menu to appear and then clic
255. ome Models RSM 2R4 Series One 1 IEC320 C14 AC Outlets RSM 16R16 1 Series 16 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 16R16 2 Series 16 each IEC320 C13 Outlets RSM 8R8 1 Series 8 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 8R8 2 Series 8 each IEC320 C13 Outlets RSM 2R4 1 Series 4 each NEMA 5 15R Outlets RSM 2R4 2 Series 4 each IEC320 C13 Outlets RS232 Port Interface Connectors RSM 16R16 Series Sixteen 16 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout RSM 8R8 Series Eight 8 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout RSM 2R4 Series Two 2 RJ45 connectors DTE pinout Coding 7 8 bits Even Odd No Parity 1 2 Stop Bits Flow Control XON XOFF RTS CTS Both or None Data Rate 300 to 115 2K bps all standard rates Internal Modem RSM 16R16 Series and RSM 8R8 Series Internal 56K v 92 Modem Optional RSM 2R4 Series Not Available Physical Environmental RSM 16R16 Series Width 19 48 8 cm Including Rack Brackets Depth 12 5 31 75 cm Height 3 5 8 9 cm RSM 8R8 Series Width 19 48 8 cm Including Rack Brackets Depth 8 75 22 2 cm Height 1 75 4 5 cm One Rack U RSM 2R4 Series Width 8 2 20 8 cm Depth 5 75 14 6 cm Height 1 75 4 5 cm One Rack U Operating Temperature 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C Humidity 10 90 RH Agency Approvals FCC UL CE 240 VAC Units Venting Side vents are used to dissipate heat generated within the unit When mounting the unit in an equipment rack make certain to allow adequate clearanc
256. on the Product Status link Note The Information provided by the Product Status Screen is intended mainly to assist WTI support peronnel with the diagnosis of user equipment problems 8 2 The Network Status Screen The Network Status screen shows activity at the TSM RSM s 16 virtual network ports To view the Network Status Screen you must access command mode using a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands To display the Network Status Screen via the Text Interface type SN and press Enter To display the Network Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface click on the Network Status link The Status Screens 8 3 The Port Status Screen The Port Status screen shows the current status of the Serial Ports including the user defined port name and port mode for each Serial Port as well as the buffer count connection status and the names of any user s currently accessing these ports Note In RSM xRy Series units the Port Status Screen is combined with a screen that lists Plug Outlet Status as described in Section 8 4 When Port Status is viewed by an account with Administrator or SuperUser command access all TSM RSM Serial Ports are listed When Port Status is viewed by an account with User or ViewOnly command access then the screen will list only the Serial Ports that are allowed by that account The Port Status Screen also shows the current status of the TSM RSM s Internal Modem
257. onfiguration Options The System Parameters menu allows you to select three different configuration parameters for the Audit Log and Alarm Log Note that the Audit and Alarm Logs function independently and parameters selected for one will not be applied to the other Off The Log is disabled command activity and or alarm events will not be logged e On With Syslog The Log is enabled power switching reboot activity and or alarm events will be logged The TSM RSM will generate a Syslog Message every time a Log record is created On Without Syslog The Log is enabled power switching reboot activity and or alarm events will be logged but the TSM RSM will not generate a Syslog Message every time a Log record is created Default Setting Notes Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power functions are not present on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units In order for the Audit Log or Alarm Log to generate Syslog Messages Syslog Parameters must first be defined as described in Section 11 The Audit Log will truncate usernames that are longer than 22 characters and display two dots in place of the remaining characters 5 14 Basic Configuration 5 5 5 2 The Temperature Log The System Parameters menu allows you to either enable or disable the Temperature Log When the Temperature Log is disabled the TSM RSM will not log temperature readings In the default state the Temp
258. onfiguration menu and save newly defined parameters When parameters are defined via the Text Interface newly defined parameters will not be saved until the Saving Configuration message is displayed To configure the TSM RSM s Alarm functions access the command mode using a password that allows Administrator level and then activate the Alarm Configuration menu in the Text Interface type AC and press Enter in the Web Browser Interface click on the Alarm Configuration link Alarm Configuration 7 1 The Over Current Alarms RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Over Current Alarms are designed to inform you when current consumption reaches or exceeds user defined levels Depending on the specific RSM 8R8 CM model RSM 8R8 CM units can have up to four Over Current Alarms two sets of two alarms The Over Current Line Initial Alarm The Over Current Line Critical Alarm Notes Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM units or standard RSM units The Over Current Alarms monitor the load on each input line The Initial alarms are used to provide notification when the level of current consumption reaches a point where you might want to investigate it whereas the Critical alarms can provide notification when the level of current consumption approaches the maximum allowed level The trigger levels for the Initial alarms are generally set lower than the trigger levels for the Critical alarms If the
259. ontrol of serial ports and plugs but does not allow access to configuration functions The User level allows access to only a select group of Administrator defined serial ports and plugs The ViewOnly level allows you to check unit status but does not allow control of serial ports or switched outlets or access to configuration menus The TSM RSM includes full Radius LDAP and TACACS capability DHCP an IP Address filter and an invalid access lockout feature An Audit Log records all user access login and logout times and command actions and an Alarm Log records user defined alarm events Environmental Monitoring and Management The TSM RSM can constantly monitor temperature levels ping response and other factors If the TSM RSM detects that user defined thresholds for these values have been exceeded the unit can promptly provide notification via email SNMP or Syslog When temperature readings exceed user defined critical values the TSM RSM can also intelligently decrease the amount of heat being generated within the rack by temporarily shutting down nonessential devices when readings return to acceptable levels the TSM RSM can restore power to those devices to return to normal operating conditions The TSM RSM also records temperature readings to a convenient log file In addition to the capabilities described above RSM 8R8 CM series units include current monitoring capabilities allowing the unit to monitor and report current power an
260. op Network Port is ETHO the bottom Network Port is ETH1 When connecting only a single network cable to a TSM series unit that includes the optional secondary Network Port make certain to connect to Port ETHO Phone Line Port Internal Modem Port When the Internal Modem option is present the phone line port is used for connection to your external phone line Unit Description uu E a www wti com RSM 8 Remote Site Manager Figure 2 5 RSM Series Front Panel Model RSM 8 Shown 2 3 RSM Series Front Panel As shown in Figure 2 5 the RSM front panel includes the following components o0 0 CLEAR Can be used to restart the RSM operating system as described in Section 2 11 ON Lights when AC Power is applied SET Can be used to initialize the RSM to default parameters as described in Section 2 11 RDY Ready Flashes to indicate unit is operational ACTIVITY LEDs A series of LEDs which will light when a CTS signal is detected and will flash during data transmission to indicate activity at the corresponding port e RSM 8 series units include 8 Activity LEDs e RSM 16 series units include 16 Activity LEDs 2 4 Unit Description mmo em gt E gt Eo Es E gt E gt EE ye CO Figure 2 7 RSM 16 Back Panel 2 4 RSM Series Back Panel As shown in Figures 2 6 and 2 7 the RSM Back Panel includes the following components Q Phone Line Po
261. options are available 1 OFF Direct Connect disabled at this port Default 2 ON NO PASSWORD The Direct Connect feature is enabled at this port but no password is required in order to connect to the port a When the Telnet connection is established the user is immediately connected directly to the specified port and the client is notified at the TCP level b This option is intended for situations where security is provided by the attached device Note 7he SSH Direct Connection function is disabled when the On No Password option is selected 3 ON PASSWORD The Direct Connect feature is enabled at this port but a password must be entered before a Direct Connection is established a Upon login the TSM RSM will prompt for a username and password If a valid username password is entered the TSM RSM will return a message which confirms the connection and lists the name and number of the port providing the user account allows access to the target port b Ifa valid username password is not entered in 30 seconds or three attempts the port will timeout and disconnect 10 2 Telnet amp SSH Functions OFF Break on Raw Disconnect When the Direct Connect option has been enabled as described in Steps 2 or 3 above this option can be used to configure the TSM RSM to send a break character whenever a Raw Socket connection to this port is terminated As described below the Break on Raw Disconnect option will work when
262. or SuperUser command access all user defined Plug Groups will be displayed When the Plug Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits User or ViewOnly level commands the screen will only include the Plug Groups that are allowed by the account Operation 9 3 Controlling Power Text Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units do not support power control functions When using the Text Interface all serial port connection and power switching functions are performed by invoking simple ASCII commands ASCII commands are also used to display status screens and to log out of command mode The Text Interface includes a Help Menu which summarizes all available commands To display the Text Interface Help Menu type H and press Enter Note When the Help Menu is displayed by an account that permits SuperUser User or ViewOnly level commands the screen will not include commands that are only available to Administrators 9 5 1 The Port and Plug Status Screen Text Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and RSM Series units do not support power control functions The Port and Plug Status Screen lists the status of the RSM xRy Series unit s serial ports and AC Outlets displays the temperature and displays the user defined Site I D
263. or a range of addresses to be allowed or denied When the IP Security feature is properly enabled and a client attempts to connect the TSM RSM will perform the following checks 1 If the client s IP address is found in the hosts allow list the client will be granted immediate access Once an IP address is found in the Allow list the TSM RSM will not check the Deny list and will assume you wish to allow that address to connect 2 Ifthe client s IP address is not found in the Allow list the TSM RSM will then proceed to check the Deny list 3 If the client s IP Address is found in the Deny list the client will not be allowed to connect 4 Ifthe client s IP Address is not found in the Deny list the client will be allowed to connect even if the address was not found in the Allow list Notes e If the TSM RSM finds an IP Address in the Allow list it will not check the Deny list and will allow the client to connect If both the Allow and Deny lists are left blank then the IP Security feature will be disabled and all IP Addresses will be allowed to connect providing that the proper password and or SSH key is supplied When the Allow and Deny lists are defined the user is only allowed to specify the Client List the Daemon List and Shell Command cannot be defined 5 55 Basic Configuration 5 9 5 1 Adding IP Addresses to the Allow and Deny Lists To add an IPv4 or IPv6 format IP Address to the Allow or Deny list an
264. ore issuing the X command Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format x Enter C Connect Establishes a bidirectional connection between two ports For more information see Section 9 1 There are two types of connections Resident Connect If the C command specifies only one port your resident port will be connected to the specified port Third Party Connect If the C command specifies two ports the unit will connect the two ports indicated Third Party Connections can only be initiated by ports and accounts that permit Administrator level commands Notes User level accounts can only connect to the ports that are specifically permitted by the account User level accounts are not allowed to create Third Party connections For example a User level account that is logged in via the Network Port cannot connect Serial Port 3 to Port 4 Administrator and SuperUser level accounts are allowed to connect to any TSM RSM Serial Port The Serial Ports are not allowed to create a Third Party connection to the Network Port For example Serial Port 1 cannot connect Serial Port 3 to the Network Port Availability Administrator SuperUser User Format C x x Enter Where x is the number or name of the port s to be connected 17 7 Command Reference Guide D Third Party Disconnect Invoke the D command at your resident port to disconnect two other ports Notes The D command cannot disconnect your
265. ort 0 For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Note 7his command is not available on TSM RSM units that do not include the optional secondary Ethernet port Availability Administrator Format N6 0 Enter N61 Network Port Parameters Ethernet Port 1 IPvG When configuring network parameters for TSM RSM units that include the optional secondary Ethernet port the N6 1 command is used to select IPv6 protocol parameters for Ethernet Port 1 For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Note 7his command is not available on TSM RSM units that do not include the optional secondary Ethernet port Availability Administrator Format N6 0 Enter 17 15 Command Reference Guide PNA Ping No Answer Configuration Parameters Standard TSM Series and Standard RSM Series Only Displays a menu that is used to define IP addresses and other associated parameters that will be used by the Ping No Answer Alarm When Ping No Answer IP addresses have been defined and the Ping No Answer Alarm has been enabled the TSM RSM can ping user defined IP addresses and notify you when devices at those IP addresses are not responding to the ping command For more information please refer to Section 7 4 1 Note This command is only available on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units The PNA command is not available on RSM xRy Series units instead Ping No Answer parameters are defined via the Reboot Options menu
266. otective cover from the terminal block attach the wires from the 48 VDC power sources to the screw terminals connect the ground line to the labeled ground screw tighten the screw terminals making certain that the wires are securely fastened and then replace the protective cover 4 2 Connecting the Network Cable The Network Port is an RJ45 Ethernet jack for connection to a TCP IP network Connect your 100Base T cable to the Network Port Some TSM RSM series units include an optional secondary Network port in addition to the primary network port RSM 16R16 series units include two Network Ports Note that the TSM RSM includes a default IPv4 protocol IP address 192 168 168 168 and a default IPv4 protocol subnet mask 255 255 255 0 When installing the TSM RSM in a working network environment it is recommended to define network parameters as described in Section 5 9 Note When connecting your network cable to a TSM RSM unit that includes two Ethernet ports make certain to connect to Port ETHO 4 5 The Internal Modem Port If your TSM RSM unit includes the optional internal modem connect an RJ11 phone line to the Internal Modem port For information on Modem Port configuration please refer to Section 5 8 Note that an external modem can also be connected to the TSM RSM serial ports as described in Section 4 5 Appendix B and Appendix C Hardware Installation 4 4 Connection to Switched Outlets Connect the power cord from your
267. ource B Input wiring to terminal block must be routed and secured in such a manner that it is protected from damage and stress Do not route wiring past sharp edges or moving parts C Areadily accessible disconnect device with a 3 mm minimum contact gap shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring Reliable earthing of this equipment must be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections when connecting to power strips rather than direct connections to the branch circuit No Serviceable Parts Inside Authorized Service Personnel Only Do not attempt to repair or service this device yourself Internal components must be serviced by authorized personnel only Shock Hazard Do Not Enter Lithium Battery CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Warnings and Cautions Disconnect Power If any of the following events are noted immediately disconnect the unit from the outlet and contact qualified service personnel 1 Ifthe power cord becomes frayed or damaged 2 If liquid has been spilled into the device or if the device has been exposed to rain or water Disconnect Power Before Servicing Before attempting to service or remove this unit please make certain to disconnect the power supply cable s from the power source s
268. password will be required at log in and all messages will be sent using encryption Notes The Authentication Privacy item is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1 V2 If the Version Parameter is set to V1 V2 V3 all and Authentication Privacy parameter is set to Auth Priv then only V3 data will be encrypted The TSM RSM supports DES encryption but does not currently support the AES protocol The TSM RSM does not support noAuth noPriv for SNMPv3 communication SNMPv3 User Name Sets the User Name for SNMPv3 Note that this option is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1 V2 Default undefined SNMPv3 Password Sets the password for SNMPv3 Note that this option is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1 V2 Default undefined SNMPv3 Password Confirm This prompt is used to confirm the SNMPv3 password that was entered at the prompt above Note that this option is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1 V2 Default undefined Authentication Protocol This parameter determines which authentication protocol will be used The TSM RSM supports both MD5 and SHA1 authentication Default MD5 Notes The Authentication Protocol that is selected for the TSM RSM must match the protocol that your SNMP client will use when querying the TSM RSM unit The Authentication Protocol option is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1 V2 Privacy Proto
269. provide notification via Email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap Notes In order for the Ping No Answer Alarm to work properly your network and or firewall as well as the devices at the target IP addresses must be configured to allow ping commands In order for this alarm to function IP Addresses for the Ping No Answer reboot feature must first be defined as described in Section 6 1 If you wish to use the Ping No Answer alarm without generating Ping No Answer reboots make certain that the Reboot Parameter in the Ping No Answer Reboot menu is set to No When a Ping No Answer condition is detected RSM xRy Series units can still reboot the user selected outlet s as described in Section 6 1 and can also send an email Syslog Message and or SNMP trap if properly configured as described in this section In order for the RSM xRy Series unit to provide Email alarm notification communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the RSM xRy Series unit to provide Syslog Message notification Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for the RSM xRy Series unit to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is triggered SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 Alarm Configuration To configure the Ping No Answer Alarm you must access the RSM xRy command mode u
270. ptoVoltage Units with Optional Dual Power Inlet Units Only Displays the status of the Lost Voltage Alarm alarmTables alarmNoDialtone Displays the status of the No Dialtone Alarm alarmTables alarmEmergencyShutoff RSM xRy Series Units Only Displays the status of the Emergency Shut Off feature For more information regarding the Emergency Shut Off feature please contact WTI Tech Support at service wti com 13 8 Operation via SNMP 13 7 Sending Traps via SNMP Traps that report various unit conditions can be sent to an SNMP Management Station from the TSM RSM The following traps are currently supported WarmStart Trap Trap indicating a warm start ColdStart Trap Trap indicating a cold start Test Trap Test trap invoked by user via the Text Interface CLI The TSM RSM can send an SNMP trap to notify you when any of the available TSM RSM alarm functions have been triggered In all cases except the Power Cycle Alarm there will be one trap sent when the alarm is triggered and a second trap sent when the alarm is cleared For more information on alarm functions please refer to Section 7 Alarm Trap Trap indicating an alarm condition A trap with a unique enterprise OID is defined for the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm under which specific trap types are defined to indicate the setting or clearing of that particular alarm condition There are separate traps for the Invalid Access Lockout Alarm The Alarm includes
271. r Example P n 1 2 2 Unit Description 2 1 TSM Series Front Panel LLI E Lj www wti com TSM 24 a LE Serial Console Manager Figure 2 1 TSM Series Front Panel Model TSM 24 Shown As shown in Figure 2 1 the TSM front panel includes the following components RESET Can be used to restart the TSM operating system as described in Section 2 11 DEFAULT Can be used to initialize the TSM to default parameters as described in Section 2 11 ON Lights when AC Power is applied RDY Ready Flashes to indicate that the unit is operational DCD Data Carrier Detect Lights when the DCD signal is present 60906060 ACTIVITY LEDs A series of LEDs which will light when a CTS signal is detected and will flash during data transmission to indicate activity at the corresponding port TSM 8 series units include 8 Activity LEDs TSM 24 series units include 24 Activity LEDs TSM 40 series units include 40 Activity LEDs 2 1 Unit Description Figure 2 4 TSM 40 Series Units Back Panel 2 2 TSM Series Back Panel As shown in Figures 2 2 2 3 and 2 4 the TSM Back Panel includes the following components D Power Inlet An IEC 320 C14 inlet for connection to your 100 to 240 VAC power supply Notes 48 VDC powered models include a terminal block assembly see Figure 4 1 in place of the power inlet For more information please refer to Section 4 1 3 So
272. r contains data the TSM RSM will display a prompt that offers the following options Display One Screen To send data one screen at a time press Enter Each time Enter is pressed the next screen is sent Display All Data To send all data currently stored in the buffer type 1 and press Enter Erase Data on Screen To erase the data currently displayed on screen type 2 and press Enter Erase all Data To erase all data currently stored in the buffer type 3 and press Enter Exit To exit from Read Buffer mode press Esc Note Only one user can read from a port buffer at a time If a second user attempts to read from a port that is already being read an error message will be sent To clear data from any port buffer with or without reading it first access command mode via the text interface using an account and port that permit Administrator SuperUser or User level commands then issue the E Erase Buffer command using the following format E xx Enter Where xx is the number of the port buffer to be cleared Notes The E command cannot erase data from a port buffer that is currently being read by another port The E command is not available to ViewOnly level accounts Buffered data can only be erased via the Text Interface The Web Browser Interface does not offer the option to erase buffered data Operation 9 1 3 2 Port Buffers The Status Screen lists the amount of Buffer Memory current
273. rator level commands and also select a number of other Serial Port Parameters described in Section 5 8 2 When responding to prompts invoking commands and selecting items from port configuration menus note the following Configuration menus are only available to Administrator level accounts e f you are configuring the TSM RSM via modem modem parameters will not be changed until after you exit command mode and disconnect from the unit e On TSM 8 Series RSM 8 Series and RSM 8R8 Series units Port 9 is the optional Internal Modem Port RSM 2R4 Series units do not include an Internal Modem Port On RSM 16 Series units and RSM 16R16 Series Units Port 17 is the optional Internal Modem Port On TSM 24 Series units Port 25 is the optional Internal Modem Port On TSM 40 Series units Port 41 is the optional Internal Modem Port The Modem Port is not present on TSM models that end with the NMI suffix 5 36 Basic Configuration 5 8 1 RS232 Port Modes The TSM RSM offers five different serial port operation modes Any to Any Mode Allows communication between connected ports and permits access to command mode Any to Any Mode Ports can be connected to other Any to Any Passive Buffer or Modem Mode Ports by invoking the C command The Any to Any Mode is available to all ports except the Internal Modem Port and is the default Port Mode for Port 1 Passive Mode Allows communication between connected ports but does
274. re can create log records of each Alarm Event As these event records are created they are sent to a Syslog Daemon located at an IP address defined via the Network Parameters menu 11 1 Configuration In order to employ this feature you must set the real time clock and calendar via the System Parameters Menu and define the IP address for the Syslog Daemon via the Network Port Configuration menu To configure the Syslog function please proceed as follows 1 Access command mode Note that the following configuration menus are only available to accounts that permit Administrator level commands 2 System Parameters Menu Access the System Parameters Menu as described in Section 5 3 then set the following parameters a Set Clock and Calendar Set the Real Time Clock and Calendar and or configure and enable the NTP server feature 3 Network Parameters Menu Access the Network Parameters Menu as described in Section 5 9 then set the following parameters a Syslog IP Address Determine the IP address for the device that will run the Syslog Daemon then use the Network Port Configuration menu to define the IP address for the Syslog Daemon Notes The Network Parameters Menu allows the definition of IP addresses for both a primary Syslog Daemon and an optional secondary Syslog Daemon The Syslog Address submenu in the Text Interface includes a Ping Test function that can be used to ping the user selected Syslog IP Address to ver
275. reate CSR 16 Import Server Private Key View CSR 17 Harden Web Security On Import CRT 18 TLS Mode TLSv1 Enter lt CR gt to change XESC to return to previous menu Figure 14 1 Web Access Parameters Text Interface Only 14 1 Setting Up SSL Encryption 14 1 Creating a Self Signed Certificate To create a Self Signed certificate access the Text interface via Telnet or SSH using a password that permits access to Administrator level commands and then proceed as follows 1 Type N and press Enter to display the Network Parameters menu 2 Atthe Network Parameters menu type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu Figure 14 1 Type 3 and press Enter and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu to enable HTTPS access 3 Next use the Web Access menu to define the following parameters Note When configuring the TSM RSM make certain to define all of the following parameters Although most SSL applications require only the Common Name in the case of the TSM RSM all of the following parameters are mandatory 5 Common Name A domain name that will be used to identify the TSM RSM unit If you will use a Self Signed certificate then this name can be any name that you choose and there is no need to set up your domain name server to recognize this name However if you will use a Signed certificate then your domain name server must be set up to recognize this name e g servic
276. rentSetTrap Indicates that the Plug Current Alarm has been triggered plugCurrentClearTrap Indicates that the Plug Current Alarm has been cleared lostOptoVoltageSetTrap Indicates that the Lost Voltage Alarm has been triggered at a unit that includes opto sensors lostOptoVoltageClearTrap Indicates that the Lost Voltage Alarm has been cleared at a unit that includes opto sensors noDialtoneSetTrap Indicates that the No Dialtone Alarm has been triggered noDialtoneClearTrap Indicates that the No Dialtone Alarm has been cleared emergencyShutoffSetTrap RSM xRy Series Units Only Indicates that an emergency shut off has been implemented For more information regarding the Emergency Shut Off feature please contact WTI Tech Support at service wti com emergencyShutoffClearTrap RSM xRy Series Units Only Indicates that an emergency shut off has been cleared For more information regarding the Emergency Shut Off feature please contact WTI Tech Support at service wti com 13 10 14 Setting Up SSL Encryption This section describes the procedure for setting up a secure connection via an HTTPS web connection to the TSM RSM Note SSL parameters cannot be defined via the Web Browser Interface In order to set up SSL encryption you must contact the TSM RSM via the Text Interface There are two different types of HTTPS security certificates Self Signed certificates and Signed certificates Self Signed certificat
277. rial ports and internal modem port All functions provided by the P command are also available via the Web Browser Interface Section 5 8 describes the procedure for defining serial port parameters Availability Administrator Format P n Enter Where n is the number or name of the desired serial port PL Set Plug Parameters Displays a menu used to select parameters for the switched outlets plugs All functions provided by the PL command are also available via the Web Browser Interface Section 5 7 describes the procedure for defining plug parameters Note 7his command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The PL command is only available on RSM xRy Series units Availability Administrator Format PL Enter G Plug Group Parameters Displays a menu used to View Add Modify or Delete Plug Groups For more information on Plug Groups please refer to Section 5 6 Note This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The G command is only available on RSM xRy Series units Availability Administrator Format G Enter N Network Port Parameters IPv4 Displays a menu used to select IPv4 protocol parameters for the Network Port All functions provided by the N command are also available via the Web Browser Interface For more information please refer to Section 5 9 Availability Administrator Format N Enter 17 14 Command Refer
278. ribute that lists the user name Note that this attribute should always end with s no quotes Default undefined Group Membership Attribute Selects the attribute that list group membership s Default undefined Group Membership Value Type Default DN Fallback Enables Disables the LDAP fallback feature When enabled the TSM RSM will revert to it s own internal user directory if no defined users are found via the LDAP server In this case port access rights will then be granted as specified in the default LDAP group Default Off Kerberos Setup Kerberos is a network authentication protocol which provides a secure means of identity verification for users who are communicating via a non secure network In the Text Interface Kerberos parameters are selected via a submenu that is only available when Kerberos is selected as Bind Type In the Web Browser Interface Kerberos parameters are defined via the main LDAP Parameters menu The following parameters are available Port Default 88 Realm Default Undefined Key Distribution Centers KDC1 through KDC5 Default Undefined Domain Realms 1 through 5 Default Undefined LDAP Group Setup Provides access to a submenu which is used to define LDAP Groups as described in the Sections 5 9 8 1 through 5 9 8 4 5 63 Basic Configuration Debug This option is used to assist WTI Technical Support personnel with the diagnosis of LDAP issues
279. ries units do not support power control functions When using the Web Browser Interface switching commands are invoked via the Plug Control Screen and Plug Group Control Screen 9 2 1 The Plug Control Screen Web Browser Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and RSM Series units do not support power control functions The Plug Control Screen lists the On Off status of the RSM xRy Series unit s Switched Outlets and is used to control switching and rebooting of the outlets To invoke power switching commands access command mode and then click on the Plug Control link on the left hand side of the screen to display the Plug Control Screen When the Plug Control Screen appears click the down arrow in the Action column for the desired outlet s then select the desired switching option from the dropdown menu and click on the Confirm Plug Actions button When the Confirm Plug Actions button is pressed the RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which lists the selected action s and asks for confirmation before proceeding To implement the selected action s click on the Execute Plug Actions button The RSM xRy Series unit will display a screen which indicates that a switching operation is in progress then display the Plug Status screen when the command is complete At that time the Status Screen will list the updated On Off status of each plug
280. rm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously defined then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Over Temperature Initial or Alarm Over Temperature Critical Alarm Configuration Load Shedding RSM xRy Series Units Only Provides access to a submenu which is used to configure and enable the Load Shedding feature for the Over Temperature alarms When Load Shedding is enabled and properly configured RSM xRy Series units can switch specific user selected plugs On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold value If the Auto Recovery feature is enabled the RSM xRy Series unit can also return these user selected plugs to their prior status when the temperature falls below the Alarm Clear Threshold value For more information please refer to Section 7 2 1 7 2 1 Over Temperature Alarms Load Shedding and Auto Recovery Note Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Load Shedding feature is not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units The Load Shedding
281. rolled manually For a summary of front panel control functions please refer to Section 2 11 9 5 Logging Out of Command Mode When you have finished communicating with the TSM RSM it is important to always disconnect using either the LogOut link Web Browser Interface or the X command Text Interface rather than by simply closing your browser window or communications program When communicating via a PDA use the PDA s Close function to disconnect and logout When you disconnect using the LogOut link or X command this ensures that the TSM RSM has completely exited from command mode and is not waiting for the inactivity timeout period to elapse before allowing additional connections 9 6 Emergency Shut Off Function RSM xRy Series units also include an Emergency Shut Off function that can be used to immediately shut off all power outlets on an RSM xRy Series unit in case of emergency For more information regarding the Emergency Shut Off feature please contact WTI Tech Support at service wti com 9 18 10 Telnet amp SSH Functions 10 1 Network Port Numbers Whenever an inbound Telnet or SSH session connects to an TSM RSM serial port the Port Status Screen and Port Diagnostics Screen will indicate that the serial port is presently connected to Port Nn where N indicates a network connection and n is a number that lists the logical Network Port being used for example N11 This Nn number is referred to as
282. rs are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously defined then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Lost Comm with Unit Alarm Configuration 7 4 The Ping No Answer Alarm The Ping No Answer Alarm can be used to provide notification when a device at a target IP address fails to respond to a ping command When properly configured and enabled the Ping No Answer Alarm can promptly notify network administrators and support personnel when a target device appears to have malfunctioned allowing quick response to equipment problems that could potentially interfere with network communication On RSM xRy Series units the Ping No Answer alarm can be used in conjunction with the Ping No Answer Reboot function to automatically reboot target devices that fail to respond to ping commands in addition to providing notification when unresponsive devices are detected The following sections describe the procedure for se
283. rt Internal Modem Port When the Internal Modem is present the phone line port is used for connection to your external phone line Network Port An RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to your 10 100Base T TCP IP network Note that the RSM features a default IPv4 format IP address 192 168 168 168 This allows you to connect to the unit without first assigning an IP address Note that the Network Port also includes two small LED indicators for Link and Data Activity For more information on Network Port configuration please refer to Section 5 9 RS232 Serial Ports For connection to console ports on target devices Standard DB9 connectors configured as DTE ports The RS232 ports are similar to a serial port on a PC When connecting a modem use a standard serial cable When connecting a PC or other DTE device please refer to Section 4 5 and Appendix B and Appendix C RSM 8 series units include 8 Serial Ports RSM 16 series units include 16 Serial Ports Power Inlet An IEC 320 C14 inlet for connection to your 100 to 240 VAC power supply Note that RSM 16DC 48 VDC powered models include a terminal block assembly see Figure 4 2 in place of the power inlet For more information please refer to Section 4 1 3 Power On Off Switch Master Power Switch Unit Description RSM 16R16 Remote Site Manager Power Control Figure 2 8 RSM 16R16 Series Front Panel 2 5 RSM 16R16 Series Front Panel As shown in Figure 2
284. ry the connection four times If neither the primary nor secondary NTP server responds the TSM RSM will wait 24 hours before attempting to contact the NTP server again Default 3 Seconds Test NTP Servers Allows you to ping the IP addresses or domain names defined via the Primary and Secondary NTP Address prompts or to ping a new address or domain defined via the Test NTP Servers submenu in order to check that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered Notes In order for the Test NTP Servers feature to function your network and or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands In addition to the Test NTP Servers option the TEST command in the Text Interface or the Test option in the Web Browser Interface can also be used to ping any user defined IP address in order to make certain that the IP adaress is responding Basic Configuration 5 3 2 The Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout Feature When properly configured and enabled the Invalid Access Lockout feature can watch all login attempts made via SSH connection Telnet connection web browser or the serial SetUp Port If the counter for any of these exceeds the user defined threshold for maximum invalid attempts then the corresponding port or protocol will be automatically disabled for the length of time specified by the Lockout Duration parameter When Invalid Access Attempt monitoring is enabled for the serial SetUp Port the TSM RSM will count invalid acc
285. s Third Party Connections can only be initiated by accounts and ports that permit Administrator or SuperUser level commands The serial ports cannot employ the C command to initiate a connection to the Network Port User level accounts are only allowed to connect to ports that are specifically allowed by the account Administrator and SuperUser level are allowed to connect to all serial ports Text Interface commands are not case sensitive When used in port connection disconnection command lines port names are also not case sensitive Operation To Connect ports using the Text Interface proceed as follows 1 2 Access command mode via the Text Interface Invoke the C command to connect the desired ports 8 Resident Connect To connect your resident port to another port type C xx Enter Where xx is the number or name of the port you want to connect The TSM RSM will display the numbers of the connected ports along with the command required in order to disconnect the two ports Example To connect your resident port to Port 8 type C 8 Enter Third Party Connect Administrator and SuperUser Mode Only To connect any two ports other than your resident port type C xx XX Enter Where xx and XX are two port names or numbers The TSM RSM will display the numbers of the two connected ports Example To connect Port 5 to Port 6 access command mode at a third port that permits Administrator level commands
286. s a Ping No Answer Reboot will be performed Default 5 Reboot Enables Disables the Ping No Answer Reboot function for the specified IP address When this item is disabled the RSM xRy Series unit will not reboot the specified outlet s when a Ping No Answer is detected However RSM xRy Series units will continue to notify you via Email Syslog Message and or SNMP Trap providing that parameters for these functions have been defined as described in Section 5 9 and the Ping No Answer Answer alarm has been enabled as described in Section 7 4 Default 2 No Notes In order for Email Text Message Notification to function you must first define Email Text Message parameters as described in Section 5 9 1 1 In order for Syslog Message Notification to function you must first define a Syslog Address as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for SNMP Trap Notification to function you must first define SNMP parameters as described in Section 5 9 7 PNA Action Determines how RSM xRy Series units will react when the IP address fails to respond to a ping RSM xRy Series units can either continuously reboot the specified outlet s and send notification until the IP address responds and the Ping No Answer Reboot is cleared Continuous Alarm Reboot or reboot the specified outlet s and send notification only once each time the Ping No Answer Reboot is initially triggered Single Alarm Reboot Default Continuous Alarm Reboot Plug Access D
287. s issued by a User level or View Only level account the resulting screen will only display parameters for the ports allowed by the account For more information please refer to Section 8 10 Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format sD Enter Response Displays Port Diagnostics Screen W Display Port Parameters Who Displays configuration information for an individual port but does not allow parameters to be changed User and ViewOnly accounts can only display parameters for their resident port For more information please refer to Section 8 13 Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format W x Enter Where x is the port number or name To display parameters for the Network Port enter an N If the x argument is omitted parameters for your resident port will be displayed Example To display parameters for a port named SERVER access the Command Mode from a port and account that permits Administrator level commands and type W SERVER Enter 17 3 Command Reference Guide SG Display Plug Group Status Screen Displays the Plug Group Status Screen which lists and briefly describes all user defined Plug Groups For more information please refer to Section 8 5 Notes This command is not available on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units The Plug Group Status Screen is only available on RSM xRy Series units In Administrator Mode all user defined Plug
288. s have been connected the V command can be used to display data that is sent between the two connected serial ports including data that has been echoed Note 7o display data sent between two connected serial ports without including echoed data please refer to the VE command Availability Administrator SuperUser Format V lt n gt Enter Where n is the number of one of the two connected serial ports VE View Connection without Echo When two TSM RSM ports have been connected the VE command can be used to display data that is sent between the two connected serial ports but will not include data that has been echoed Note 7o display data sent between two connected serial ports including echoed data please refer to the V command Availability Administrator SuperUser Format VE lt n gt Enter Where n is the number of one of the two connected serial ports H Help Displays a Help Screen which lists all available Text Interface commands along with a brief description of each command Note n the Administrator Mode the Help Screen will list the entire TSM RSM command set In SuperUser Mode User Mode and ViewOnly Mode the Help Screen will only list the commands that are allowed for that Access Level Availability Administrator SuperUser User ViewOnly Format H Enter L Log Functions Provides access to a menu which allows you to display the Audit Log Alarm Log Temperature Log standard TSM and
289. s user defined trigger levels the TSM RSM can also notify support personnel via Email Syslog Message or SNMP trap In addition to the monitoring and notification capabilities provided by standard TSM RSM series units RSM 8R8 CM series units can also measure and record current power and voltage conditions at each power outlet Notes Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM units or standard RSM units In order to send alarm notification via email email addresses and parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 Email alarm notification will then be sent for all alarms that are enabled as described in this Section In order to send alarm notification via Syslog Message a Syslog address must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 2 Once the Syslog address has been defined Syslog Messages will be sent for every alarm that is discussed in this Section providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for the alarm has been set to On In order to send alarm notification via SNMP Trap SNMP Trap parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 7 Once SNMP Trap Parameters have been defined SNMP Traps will be sent for every alarm that is discussed in this Section providing that the Trigger Enable parameter for the alarm has been set to On After defining parameters via the Text Interface make certain to press the Esc key several times to completely exit from the c
290. s whether the RSM 8R8 CM will display total current consumption for each branch Unit or current consumption for each outlet Plug The Power Metering Log Menu also allows you to either display Power Metering Data or download Power History Data 2 Display Power Metering Type 2 and press Enter The RSM 8R8 CM will display the Power Metering menu which allows you to set a date range for the desired data and display the data selected 3 Download Power History Type 3 and press Enter to display the Power History Screen or download Power History data in CSV or XML format Web Interface Place the cursor over the Power Metering link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the Power History link to display the Power History menu The Power History menu offers the options to display Power History as a graph or display download the Power History in ASCII CSV or XML format click on the link for the desired option The RSM 8R8 CM will display a screen that allows you to select all plugs one or more plug groups or up to four individual plugs Check the box next to the desired option then click on the Select Plugs button to display the Power History graph Notes When the Unit Display Data Option is selected the Power Metering Log will list power data for each input line as well as the total for all RSM 8R8 CW outlets When the Plugs Display Data Option is selected the Power Metering L
291. scribed in Section 5 1 Click on the Port Control link on the left hand side of the screen to display the Port Control Screen When the Port Control Screen appears click the down arrow in the Action column for the desired serial port s select the Disconnect option from the dropdown menu for and then click on the Confirm Port Actions button When the Confirm Port Actions button is pressed the TSM RSM will display a screen which lists the selected action s and asks for confirmation before proceeding To implement the selected port action s click on the Execute Port Actions button After a brief pause the TSM RSM will display the Port Status Screen confirming that the selected ports have been disconnected Notes Port connections cannot be created via the Web Browser Inteface To connect TSM RSM ports please refer to Section 9 1 1 1 When the Port Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits Administrator or SuperUser command access all TSM RSM Serial Ports will be displayed When the Port Control Screen is displayed by an account that permits User or ViewOnly level commands the screen will only include the TSM RSM Serial Ports that are allowed by the account Operation 9 1 1 4 Defining Hunt Groups Text Interface A Hunt Group creates a situation where the TSM RSM will scan a group of similarly named ports and connect to the first available port in the group Hunt Groups are created by assigning identic
292. set for Modem Mode DTR output is controlled by the DTR Output option Serial Port Parameters Menu Option 23 Upon disconnect Option 23 allows DTR output to be held low held high or pulsed for 0 5 seconds and then held high Apx 3 Appendices B 2 TSM and RSM xRy Series RJ45 Serial Ports When connecting Devices to TSM Series or RSM xRy Series RJ45 Serial Console Ports please refer to Figure B 1 and the table below Target Device End Adapter Cable WTI Device End RJ Serial Console Ports None Required RJ45 Rollover Cable WTI TSM Series or Cisco Routers Juniper Routers RJ ROLL 7 Feet RSM xRy Series and Other Network Devices RJ ROLL 25 25 Feet RJ45 DCE Serial with RJ45 Serial Console Port Console Port DB9M Serial Console Ports DX9F DTE RJ RJ45 Straight Cable Linux PC or Liinux Laptop WTI Snap Adapter RJX 7 7 Feet RSM Series Units RJX 15 15 Feet WTI MPC SEries Units and RJX 25 25 Feet Other Devices with a DB9M RJX 50 50 Feet Serial Console Port DB25F Serial Console Ports DX25M DTE RJ RJ45 Straight Cable Terminal DTE and Other Snap Adapter RJX 7 7 Feet Devices with DB25F Serial RJX 15 15 Feet Console Port RJX 25 25 Feet RJX 50 50 Feet Note For RJ45 console ports on target devices that are not pinned as a Cisco interface try standard Cat5 straight cable For all other non standard interfaces please contact WTI Technical Support for assistance and be prepared to provide a serial pi
293. sing a password that permits Administrator Level commands Up to 54 Ping No Answer IP Addresses can be defined The Add Ping No Answer menu is used to define the following parameters for each new Ping No Answer IP Address Trigger Enable Enables Disables the trigger for this alarm When Disabled this alarm will be suppressed Default On Notes To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm simply toggle the Trigger Enable parameter to Off and then back On again The Trigger Enable Notify on Clear Email Message and Address 1 2 and 3 Parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options that allow you to enable disable the corresponding parameter for all RSM xRy alarms For example if the Ping No Answer Alarm s Trigger Enable parameter is set to On Copy to All Triggers then all other RSM xRy alarms will also be enabled Resend Delay Determines how long the RSM xRy Series unit will wait to resend an email message generated by this alarm when the initial attempt to send the notification was unsuccessful Default 60 Minutes Notify Upon Clear When this item is enabled the RSM xRy Series unit will send additional notification when the situation that caused the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the RSM xRy Series unit will send initial notification when it detects that a Ping command has failed and then send a second notification when it determines that the I
294. sis Example Assume that the Low Threshold for Outlet A1 is set at 5 Amps the High Threshold is set at 12 Amps and the Plug Hysteresis value is set at 1 Amp When the current goes high or low the RSM 8R8 CM will respond as follows Low Alarm If the current drops below 5 Amps the RSM 8R8 CM will generate an Alarm The Alarm will not be cleared until the current rises above 6 Amps 5 Amp Low Threshold 1 Amp Hysteresis Value 6 Amps High Alarm If the current rises above 12 Amps the RSM 8R8 CM will generate an Alarm The Alarm will not be cleared until the current drops below 11 Amps 12 Amp High Threshold 1 Amp Hysteresis Value 11 Amps 7 22 Alarm Configuration Plug Thresholds Defines current consumption level s that will trigger alarm s at each switched outlet The Plug Thresholds can be configured to trigger an alarm when current consumption rises above a user defined High value and or when current consumption falls below a user defined Low value This allows you to define a normal current range for each outlet allowing the Plug Current Alarm to be triggered whenever current consumption strays outside of this range Default undefined Plug Group Thresholds Defines current consumption level s that will trigger alarm s for each user defined Plug Group The Plug Group Thresholds can be configured to trigger an alarm when total current consumption for a given Plug Group rises above a user defined High va
295. splayed by a User or ViewOnly level account then the screen will only display the status of the ports specifically allowed by the account 8 12 The Alarm Status Screen The Alarm Status Screen lists all available user defined alarms and indicates whether or not each alarm has been triggered The resulting screen will display Yes or 1 for alarms that have been triggered or No or 0 for alarms that have not been triggered If desired the AS command line can also include an optional alarm argument that will cause the unit to display the status of one individual alarm For a list of alarm arguments please refer to Section 17 3 1 kx The Status Screens 8 13 The Port Parameters Screens The W Who command displays more detailed information about an individual TSM RSM port Rather than listing general connection information for all ports the Port Parameters screen lists all defined parameters for a specific port When the W command is invoked by an Administrator or SuperUser level account it can be used to display parameters for all TSM RSM Serial Ports plus the Network Port If the W command is invoked by a User or ViewOnly level account then it will only display parameters for the Serial Ports that are specifically allowed for that account and will not display parameters for the Network Port The W command uses the following format W xx Enter Where xx is the desired port number If the W command is invoked at a
296. stem Parameters menu In the Web Browser Interface Real Time Clock parameters are defined via the Real Time Clock submenu which is accessed via the General Parameters menu Invalid Access Lockout If desired this feature can be used to disable serial port access SSH access Telnet access and or Web access to the TSM RSM command mode after a user specified number of unsuccessful login attempts are made For more information please refer to Section 5 3 2 Default Off Note The Invalid Access Lockout item does not appear in the Web Browser Interface System Parameters menu In the Web Browser Interface Invalid Access Lockout parameters are defined via the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout submenu which is accessed via the General Parameters menu located on the left hand side of the screen Basic Configuration Temperature Format Determines whether the temperature is displayed as Fahrenheit or Celsius Default Fahrenheit Temperature Calibration Used to calibrate the unit s internal temperature sensing abilities To calibrate the temperature place a thermometer inside your equipment rack in a location that usually experiences the highest temperature After a few minutes take a reading from the thermometer and then key the reading into the configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface the temperature is entered at the System Parameters menu in the Temperature Calibration field in the Text Interface the temperature is
297. store the previously saved correct parameters To restore the previously saved configuration proceed as follows 1 Access command move via the Text Interface using a username password that permits access to Administrator level commands 2 Atthe RSM command prompt type I and press Enter The TSM RSM will display a submenu that offers several different reboot options 3 Atthe submenu you may choose either Item 4 Reboot amp Restore Last Known Working Configuration Type 4 and then press Enter 4 The TSM RSM will reboot and previously saved parameters will be restored 5 73 6 Reboot Options In addition to performing reboot cycles in response to commands RSM xRy Series Units can also be configured to automatically reboot outlets when an attached device does not respond to a Ping command Ping No Answer Reboot or according to a user defined schedule Scheduled Reboot Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power switching and reboot functions are not supported on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units Ping No Answer Reboot When the Ping No Answer feature is enabled RSM xRy Series units will Ping a user selected IP address at regular intervals If the IP address does not respond to the Ping command the RSM xRy Series unit will reboot one or more user selected outlet s Typically this feature is used to reboot devices when they cease to respond
298. t Alarm Plug Current Plug Shedding Allows individual plugs to be automatically switched Off or left On when current consumption at the plug rises above the user defined high Plug Threshold value Default Leave On Note n order to enable Plug Shedding you must first set the high Plug Threshold value for each desired plug Plug Group Shedding Allows user defined Plug Groups to be automatically switched Off or left On when current consumption by the Plug Group rises above the user defined high Plug Group Threshold high Default Leave On Note n order to enable Plug Group Shedding you must first set the high Plug Group Threshold for each desired Plug Group 7 24 Alarm Configuration 7 9 The No Dialtone Alarm The No Dialtone Alarm enables the TSM RSM to monitor a telephone line connected to an external modem installed at the TSM RSM Setup Port and then provide notification if the TSM RSM detects that the phone line is dead or no dialtone is present When the No Dialtone Alarm is enabled the TSM RSM will monitor the telephone line checking for a dialtone If no dialtone is detected for the duration of the currently defined Reset No Dialtone Interval value the No Dialtone Alarm can provide notification via email using a network connection In the event that the TSM RSM unit is not connected to a network cable the TSM RSM will also create an entry in the Alarm Log indicating that the No Dialtone Alarm has been trigg
299. t have access to the plug and a 1 indicates that the user does have access to the plug userTable userPortAccess A string of up to 9 characters with one character for each of the 9 possible serial ports on the TSM RSM unit A 0 indicates that the account does not have access to the port and a 1 indicates that the user does have access to the port Note The number of ports specified in the userPortAccess string must not exceed the number of serial ports available on your TSM RSM unit If the userPortAccess string specifies more serial ports than are available on the unit an error message will be generated userTable userGroupAccess RSM xRy Series Units Only A string of 54 characters with one character for each of the 54 possible plug groups in the system A 0 indicates that the account does not have access to the plug group and a 1 indicates that the user does have access to the plug group userTable userSerialAccess Access to the serial interface 0 No access 1 Access userTable userTelnetSshAccess Access to the Telnet SSH interface 0 No access 1 Access userTable userOutboundTelSshAccess Access to Outbound Telnet SSH 0 No access 1 Access userTable userWebAccess Access to the Web interface 0 No access 1 Access userTable userCallbackNum 32 character callback number for account userTable userSubmit Set to 1 to submit changes 13 2 Op
300. t the TSM RSM can send to notify you when an alarm is triggered To define email message parameters access the TSM RSM Command Mode using a password that permits access to Administrator Level commands and then proceed as follows Text Interface Type N for IPv4 parameters or N6 for IPv6 parameters and press Enter to access the Network Configuration Menu Key in the number for the Email Messaging option and press Enter to display the Email Messaging Menu Web Browser Interface Place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears select either the link for IPv4 parameters or IPv6 parameters to display the Email Messaging Menu The Email Configuration menu offers the following options Enable Enables Disables the Email Messaging feature When disabled the TSM RSM will not be able to send email messages when an alarm is generated Default Off SMTP Server This prompt is used to define the address of your SMTP Email server Default undefined Port Number Selects the TCP IP port number that will be used for email connections Default 25 Domain The domain name for your email server Default undefined Note n order to use domain names you must first define Domain Name Server parameters as described in Section 5 9 5 User Name The User Name that will be entered when logging into your email server Default undefined Pass
301. ter or OF ROUTER Enter Reboot Plug s To initiate a Boot cycle type BOOT n and press Enter Where n is the number or name of the desired plug or Plug Group Note that the BOOT command can also be entered as Bo For example BOOT 3 Enter or BO ATMSWTCH Enter Set All Plugs to Power Up Defaults Type DPL and press Enter All plugs permitted by your account will be set to their default On Off status which is defined via the Plug Parameters Menu as described in Section 5 7 Notes When you have accessed command mode using an account that permits Administrator or SuperUser level command access the Default command will be applied to all plugs When you have accessed command mode using an account that only permits User level command access the Default command will only be applied to the plugs specifically allowed by that account Switching commands are not available in ViewOnly mode Suppress Command Confirmation Prompt To execute a Boot On Off command without displaying the Sure prompt you can either disable command confirmation via the System Parameters Menu or include the Y option at the end of the command line For example ON ROUTER Y or BOOT 2 Y Operation 9 3 2 1 Applying Commands to Several Plugs Text Interface Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Standard TSM Series units and RSM Series units do not support power control functions
302. termines that power has been restored Default On Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages generated by this alarm Default Alarm Lost Voltage 7 28 8 The Status Screens The Status Screens are used to display status information about the TSM RSM serial ports switched outlets Network Port Plug Groups Temperature Log Alarm Log and Audit Log The Status Screens are available via both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface 8 1 Product Status The Product Status Screen lists the model number power rating product serial number and other information regarding the TSM RSM unit To display the Product Status Screen via the Text Interface type J and then press Enter To display the Product Status Screen via the Web Browser Interface click
303. the alarm has been corrected For example when Notify Upon Clear is enabled the TSM RSM will send initial notification when it detects that a Ping command has failed and then send a second notification when it determines that the IP address is again responding to the Ping command Default On Alarm Configuration Email Message Enables Disables email notification for this alarm Default On Address 1 2 and 3 These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu see Section 5 9 11 will receive the email alarm notification messages generated by this alarm The Address parameters can be used to select one or any combination of the addresses defined via the Email Messages menu Default All On Note f Email addresses have been previously specified then the text under the parameters will list the current user defined email addresses Subject This parameter is used to define the text that will appear in the Subject field for all email notification messages that are generated by this alarm Default Alarm Ping No Answer 7 4 2 Ping No Answer Alarm RSM xRy Series Units The Ping No Answer Alarm can provide notification when one of the IP addresses defined via the Ping No Answer Reboot feature as described in Section 6 1 fails to respond to a Ping command When one of the user defined IP addresses fails to answer a Ping command RSM xRy Series units can
304. thernet port zero type N6 0 and press Enter To define IPv6 parameters for Ethernet port one type N6 1 and press Enter Web Browser Interface Although the Web Browser Interface cannot be used to select non shared parameters i e IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DHCP setting and Negotiation setting parameters that are shared by both Ethernet ports can still be defined via Web Place the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the fly out menu to appear and then click on the link to display the desired menu Some submenus offer the option to define IPv4 or IPv6 parameters in these cases a flyout menu will appear to allow the user to select IPv4 or IPv6 5 47 Basic Configuration 5 9 1 Network Port Parameters In the Text Interface these parameters are found in the main Network Configuration menu In the Web Browser Interface these parameters are found by placing the cursor over the Network Configuration link on the left hand side of the screen and then clicking on the Network Port Parameters link in the resulting fly out menu Administrator Mode Permits denies port access to accounts that allow Administrator level commands When enabled Permit the port will be allowed to invoke Administrator level commands providing they are issued by an account that permits them If disabled Deny then accounts that permit Administrator level commands will not be allowed
305. tion the lockout trigger is a function of the SSH Hit Count parameter and the SSH Lockout Duration Parameter Lockout Enable Enables Disables Invalid Access Lockout protection for SSH connections Default Off e SSH Hit Count The number of invalid attempts that must occur during the length of time specified by the SSH Lockout Duration period in order to trigger the Invalid Access Lockout feature for SSH protocol For example if the SSH Hit Count parameter is set to 10 and the SSH Lockout Duration parameter is set to 30 minutes then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for 30 minutes when over 10 invalid access attempts occur during any 30 minute long period Default 20 SSH Lockout Duration This option selects both the length of time that an SSH Lockout will remain in effect and also the time period over which invalid access attempts will be counted When an SSH Lockout occurs the offending MAC address will be prevented from establishing an SSH connection to the TSM RSM for the defined SSH Lockout Duration period Default 2 Seconds Telnet Protection Enables Disables and configures the Invalid Access function for Telnet connections When this item is enabled and excessive Invalid Access Attempts via Telnet are detected then the TSM RSM will lock out the offending MAC address for the user defined Telnet Lockout Duration Period or until the UL command is issued Note that for Telnet protection the lockout trig
306. tly via Telnet SSH or Raw Socket In order to configure TSM RSM serial ports for IP Aliasing you must first access the Serial Port Configuration menu for the desired port s as described in Section 5 8 2 In addition you must also set the Direct Connect feature to either On Password or On No Password as described in Section 5 8 2 Once a TSM RSM serial port has been configured as described above users can connect to the port in the same manner that would be used to establish a connection with any other IP address For example if the serial port IP Alias was set to 1 2 3 4 then users would be able to connect to the port via Telnet using the following connect command telnet 1 2 3 4 Enter Notes The IP Alias feature is only available when the Direct Connect feature is set to On Password or On No Password To display the assigned IP Alias for each serial port via the Text Interface type SA and press Enter To display the IP Alias status via the Web Browser Interface place the cursor over the Port Status link on the left hand side of the screen wait for the flyout menu to appear and then click on the Alias Status link 10 8 Teinet amp SSH Functions 10 5 Creating an Outbound Telnet Connection The TSM RSM includes a TELNET command that can be used to create an outbound Telnet connection In order to use the TELNET command you must access the TSM RSM s Text Interface command mode using an ac
307. to access command mode via this port Default Permit Logoff Character Defines the Logoff Character for the network port This determines which command s must be issued at this port in order to disconnect from a second port Default X Ctrl plus X Note The Sequence Disconnect parameter can be used to pick a one character or a three character logoff sequence Sequence Disconnect Enables Disables and configures the Resident Disconnect command Offers the option to either disable the Sequence Disconnect or select a one character or three character command format Default One Character Notes The One Character Disconnect is intended for situations where the destination port should not receive the disconnect command When the Three Character format is selected the disconnect sequence will pass through to the destination port prior to breaking the connection When Three Character format is selected the Resident Disconnect uses the format Enter LLL Enter where L is the selected Logoff Character Inactivity Timeout Enables and selects the Inactivity Timeout period for the Network Port If enabled and the port does not receive or transmit data for the specified time period the port will disconnect Default 5 Minutes Command Echo Enables or Disables the command echo for the Network Port Default On Accept Break Determines whether the port will accept breaks received from the attached
308. to the Ping command Scheduled Reboot A scheduled reboot is used to initiate a reboot cycle at a user selected time and day of the week When properly configured and enabled RSM xRy Series units will reboot one or more outlets on a daily or weekly basis The Scheduled Reboot feature can also be used to switch outlet s Off at a user selected time and then switch them back On again at a later user selected time This section describes the procedure for configuring and enabling Ping No Answer Reboots and Scheduled Reboots Note When defining parameters via the Text Interface make certain to press the Esc key several times to completely exit from the configuration menus and save newly defined parameters When parameters are defined via the Text Interface newly defined parameters will not be saved until the Saving Configuration message is displayed Reboot Options 6 1 Ping No Answer Reboot A Ping No Answer Reboot can be used to reboot one or more outlets when an attached device does not respond to a Ping Command In addition the Ping No Answer Reboot feature can also be configured to send an email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap to notify you whenever a Ping No Answer Reboot occurs Please refer to Section 7 4 for instructions on setting up email alarm notification for Ping No Answer reboots Note Power switching and reboot functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power switching and reboot functions are not supported on
309. trator level commands 5 28 Basic Configuration 5 6 The Plug Group Directory Note Power control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Directory is not present on standard TSM Series units and standard RSM Series units The Plug Group Directory allows you to designate groups of plugs that are dedicated to a similar function and will most likely be switched or rebooted all at the same time or controlled by the same type of user account For example an individual equipment rack might include an assortment of devices that belong to different departments or clients In order to simplify the process of granting plug access rights to the accounts that will control power to these devices you could assign all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department A to a Plug Group named Dept A and all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department B to a Plug Group named Dept B When user accounts are defined this would allow you to quickly grant access rights for all of the plugs for the devices belonging to Department A to the appropriate user accounts for Department A by merely granting access to the Dept A Plug Group rather than by selecting the specific individual plugs for each Department A user account Likewise Plug Groups allow you to direct On Off Boot commands to a series of plugs without addressing each plug individually Given the example above you could quickly reboot all plugs for
310. tring IP Address and other communication related parameters The Modem PPP Mode is not available at the Network Port For more information on Port Modes please refer to Section 9 1 5 37 Basic Configuration 5 8 2 The Serial Port Configuration Menu To configure the TSM RSM s Serial Ports via the Text Interface type P n and then press Enter Where n is the name or number of the desired port To configure the Serial Ports via the Web Browser Interface click the Serial Port Configuration link on the left hand of the screen and then use the dropdown menu to select the desired port The Serial Port Configuration menu allows the following parameters to be defined Note that all of these parameters are available via both the Text Interface and Web Browser Interface and that parameters selected via one interface are also applied to the other Communication Settings Baud Rate Any standard rate from 300 bps to 460K bps Defaults Serial Ports 1 to 8 9600 bps Internal Modem Port 57 6K bps Note RSM 2R4 Series units do not include an internal modem port Bits Parity Default 8 None Stop Bits Default 1 Handshake Mode XON XOFF RTS CTS hardware Both or None Default RTS CTS General Parameters Administrator Mode Permits denies port access to Administrator level accounts When enabled Permit the port will be allowed to invoke Administrator level commands providing they are issued by an account that
311. ts allowed by that account e Hunt Group port names must be unique Otherwise ports with similar names will also be included in the Hunt Group Hunt Group Example 1 1 Ports 1 and 2 are Modem Mode ports and modems are installed at both ports Port 1 is named MODEM 1 and Port 2 is named MODEM2 2 Your resident port is Port 4 To connect to the first available Modem type C MODEM Enter Hunt Group Example 2 1 Ports 3 4 and 5 are Any to Any Mode ports All three ports are named SERVER 2 Your resident port is Port 1 If you want to connect Port 2 to the first available server type C 2 SERVER Enter Operation 9 1 2 Passive Mode Passive Mode Ports function the same as Any to Any Mode Ports but do not allow access to command mode A Passive Mode Port can be connected to other serial ports but cannot enter command mode and therefore cannot be used to define parameters display status or invoke commands to connect ports or control power switching The Passive Mode is the default at Serial Ports 2 and above Passive Mode Ports can be connected by accessing command mode from a free Any to Any or Modem Mode Port and invoking the Third Party Connect or Resident Connect Command as described in Section 9 1 1 1 Passive Mode ports will not buffer data except during baud rate conversion Note n order to ensure Administrator level access to important command functions the Passive Mode is not available at Port 1 the
312. tting up the Ping No Answer alarm on both RSM xRy Series units as well as standard TSM and RSM Series units 7 4 4 Ping No Answer Notification TSM and RSM Series Units When properly configured standard TSM Series and RSM Series units can provide notification when a device at a user specified IP address fails to respond to a ping command When one of the user defined IP addresses fails to answer a Ping command the TSM RSM can provide notification via Email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap Notes In order for the Ping No Answer Alarm to work properly your network and or firewall as well as the device at the target IP address must be configured to allow ping commands In order for this alarm to function at least one target IP Address for the Ping No Answer Alarm must be defined as described in Section 7 4 1 1 In order for the TSM RSM to provide Email alarm notification communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 5 9 11 In order for the TSM RSM to provide Syslog Message notification Syslog parameters must first be defined and Syslog Messages must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 2 In order for the TSM RSM to provide SNMP Trap notification when this alarm is triggered SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP Traps must be enabled as described in Section 5 9 7 7 4 1 1 Defining Ping No Answer IP Addresses TSM and RSM Series Units In order for the Ping No Answer Alarm to functio
313. ty is a concern and the Automated Mode is required it is recommended to use the IP Security feature Section 5 9 3 to restrict access Command Prompt Allows the Text Interface command prompt to be set to either IPS RSM TSM or the currently defined Site I D Message Default for TSM Series units TSM Default for RSM RSM xRy Series units RSM Basic Configuration PS Mode RSM xRy Series Units Only This parameter can be used to set up RSM xRy Series units for use with command scripts that were written for WTI s IPS Series Remote Reboot Switches When the IPS Mode is enabled the IPS command prompt will be displayed in the Text Mode User Accounts will not allow definition of a Username and only the password prompt will be displayed when logging into the unit IPS Mode units will not display a username prompt Default Off The IPS command prompt will be displayed in the Text Mode Providing that no Administrator level user accounts are defined the unit will not display the username or password prompts upon login to command mode If one or more Administrator level user accounts have been defined then the RSM xRy Series Unit will only display the password prompt upon login to command mode If all Administrator level user accounts aside from the default super account are deleted then the RSM xRy Series Unit will return to the status where no username or password prompts are displayed upon login to command
314. u which allows you to set a date range for the desired data and display the data selected c Download Power History See Section 8 9 Web Browser Interface 1 Place the cursor over the Power Metering link on the left hand side of the screen When the fly out menu appears click on the Power Range link to display the Select Plugs menu 2 Select the desired plugs then click the Select Plugs button to display the List Power Range menu 3 Usethe List Power Range menu to select the desired date range and then click on the Get Chart button In the Text Interface Power Metering data will be displayed in table format In the Web Browser Interface Power Metering data will be displayed in both table and graph format The Status Screens 8 9 The Power History Screen RSM 8R8 CM Series Only The Power History Screen shows power consumption versus time To view the Power History Screen access the command mode using an account that permits access to Administrator or SuperUser level commands and then proceed as follows Note Current and Power Monitoring features are not available on standard TSM series units or standard RSM series units Text Interface Type L and press Enter to access the Display Logs menu From the Display Logs menu type 4 and press Enter to display the Power Metering Log menu The Power Metering Log menu offers the following options 1 Display Data Option The Display Data Option determine
315. ug 3 AFTER Plug No Priority to Priority 1 Plug No Priority 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 0 a0 4 4 4 4 Figure 5 1 Boot Priority Example 1 5 34 Basic Configuration 5 7 1 2 Example 2 Change Plug 4 to Priority 2 In the second Example shown in Figure 5 2 we start out with Boot Priorities for the plugs set as they were at the end of Example 1 Plug 3 is first Plug 1 is second Plug 2 is third and Plug 4 is fourth Next the Boot Priority for Plug 4 is changed to Priority 2 This means that Plug 3 will continue to be switched on first after a reboot but now Plug 4 will be switched on second Plug 1 will be third and Plug 2 will be fourth Once again note that when the Boot Priority for Plug 4 is set to 2 the Boot Priorities for all plugs that were previously Booted before plug 4 are now lowered by a factor of one BEFORE Assign Plug 4 AFTER Plug No Priority to Priority 2 Plug No Priority 1 2 1 3 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 1 4 4 O aM Figure 5 2 Boot Priority Example 2 5 35 Basic Configuration 5 8 Serial Port Configuration The Serial Port Configuration menus allow you to select parameters for the TSM RSM s Serial Ports as well as the Internal Modem Port The Serial Ports can be configured for connection to a local PC or Modem In addition the Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used to set communications parameters disable Administ
316. up by that account Note Power switching functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units Power contro functions are not present on standard TSM Series and standard RSM Series units In addition each command access level also restricts the plugs and plug groups that the account will be allowed to access Administrator Accounts with Administrator access are always allowed to control all plugs and plug groups Plug access cannot be disabled for Administrator level accounts SuperUser SuperUser accounts allow access to all plugs and plug groups by default Plug access cannot be disabled for SuperUser level accounts User Accounts with User level access are only allowed to issue switching and reboot commands to the plugs and plug groups that have been specifically permitted via the Plug Access parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus ViewOnly Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to issue switching and reboot commands to outlets or plug groups ViewOnly accounts can display the status of plugs and plug groups but are limited to the plugs and plug groups specified by the account 5 24 Basic Configuration 5 5 Managing User Accounts The User Directory function is employed to create new accounts display parameters for existing accounts modify accounts and delete accounts Up to 128 different user accounts can be created The User Directory function is only available when you have logged into comma
317. ure exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold and the Load Shedding feature is triggered For example if you have defined a Plug Group named test which includes Plugs 2 3 and 4 and then select the test Plug Group via the Plug Group Access parameter then all of the plugs in the test Plug Group will be switched On or Off whenever the temperature exceeds the Alarm Set Threshold Default undefined Notes Power Control functions are only available on RSM xhy Series units The Load Shedding feature is not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units In the Text Interface Plug Group Access is configured by typing 5 pressing Enter and then selecting the desired Plug Group s from the resulting submenu In the Web Browser Interface Plug Group Access is configured by clicking on the plus symbol in the Configure Plug Group Access field to display the drop down menu and then selecting the desired Plug Group s from the drop down menu Plug Groups must first be defined as described in Section 5 6 before they will be displayed in the Load Shedding menu s Plug Group Access submenu 7 9 Alarm Configuration 7 3 The Lost Communication Alarm The Lost Communication with Unit Alarm is intended to provide prompt notification when communication with an attached WTI device is disrupted When the Lost Communication Alarm is triggered the TSM RSM can provide notification via Email Syslog Message or SNMP Trap
318. used to restore the unit to previously saved parameters When the I command is invoked the unit will offer four reboot options Reboot Only Do NOT default parameters Reboot amp Default Keep IP Parameters amp SSH Keys Default all other parameters Reboot amp Default Default ALL parameters Reboot amp Restore Last Known Working Configuration Availability Administrator Format 1 Enter UF Upgrade Firmware When new versions of the TSM RSM firmware become available this command is used to update existing firmware as described in Section 16 Notes The Firmware Upgrade Utility is the preferred method for managing TSM RSM firmware upgrades The UF command is intended to provide an alternative to the Firmware Upgrade Utility For more information please refer to Section 16 1 When a firmware upgrade is performed the TSM RSM will require 15 minutes for the upgrade procedure Availability Administrator Format UF Enter CP Copy RS232 Port Parameters Allows quick set up when several serial ports will be configured with similar parameters When the CP command is invoked the TSM RSM will display a menu that can be used to copy parameters to RS232 ports For more information please refer to Section 5 8 3 Note 7o proceed with the Copy function after selecting new parameters press Esc the TSM RSM will then display the confirmation prompt before proceeding Availability Administrator Format c
319. used with a Straight RJ 45 cable to attach the following DB 9M DTE devices to the RJ 45 Serial Ports on TSM Series and RSM xRy Series units PCs and Laptops Console Ports on WTI RSM Series Units Console Ports on WTI MPC Series Units Other Devices with a DB 9M DTE Console Port When connecting a DB 9M DTE device to an RJ 45 Serial Port on a TSM Series or RSM xRy Series unit please refer to Figure C 3 and Figure C 4 below RJ 45 DB 9F Pin No Pin No Signal 1 8 CTS 2 1 DCD 3 2 RXD 4 5 GND 5 Pin 8 Pin 1 6 3 TXD Female 7 4 DTR 8 7 RTS Figure C 3 DX9F DTE RJ Snap Adapter Interface RJ 45 DCE DB 9M DTE TSM or Serial Port Console Port PC Laptop RSM xRy or Other Series Unit Straight Device with RJ 45 Cable DB 9M DTE Interface DX9F DTE RJ Snap Adapter Figure C 4 Connecting DB 9M DTE Devices to TSM and RSM xRy Series Units Apx 7 Appendices C 3 Connecting DB 25F DTE Devices The DX25M DTE RJ Snap Adapter can be used with a Straight RJ 45 cable to attach the most DB 25F DTE devices to RJ 45 Serial Ports on TSM Series or RSM xRy Series units When connecting a DB 25F DTE device to an RJ 45 Serial Port on a TSM Series or RSM xRy Series unit please refer to Figure C 5 and Figure C 6 below RJ 45 DB 25M mis Pin No Pin No Signal 1 5 CTS o9 2 8 DCD 92 o 3 3 TXD o es 4 7 GND S o 5 oo o o Pins Pin1 6 2 RXD o 5 o 7 20 DTR o o o 8 4 RTS 9 Male Figure C 5 DX25M DTE RJ Snap
320. using an account that also permits Administrator or SuperUser level commands and invoke the following command C 5 6 Enter Notes Resident Connections TSM RSM serial ports are not allowed to initiate a Resident Connection to the Network Port Third Party Connections Serial ports are not allowed to connect another port to the network port For example Port 1 is not allowed to connect Port 3 to the Network Port Notes When the Inactivity Timeout is disabled this allows ports to automatically reconnect after a power interruption When power is restored to the unit pairs of ports that were previously connected will be automatically reconnected providing that the Inactivity Timeout is disabled at both ports and the two ports have been connected for at least ten minutes prior to the power interruption The only exception to this rule is Serial Port 1 which will remain disconnected after power is restored in order to provide a free serial port for local access to command mode When the C command specifies the port name it is only necessary to enter enough letters to differentiate the desired port from other ports Type an asterisk to represent the remaining characters in the port name For example to connect your resident port to a port named SALES the connect command can be invoked as C S providing no other port names begin with the letter S Operation 9 1 1 2 Disconnecting Ports Text Interface The Text Inter
321. ut No activity timeout disconnects port modem sessions Off 5 15 30 90 minutes Memory Stores Parameters and captured data 256K per port Break Send Break or Inhibit Break Site ID 32 Characters Port Name 16 Characters per port Usernames amp Passwords 16 characters each case sensitive Up to 128 pairs LEDs On Ready DCD plus Connection Activity for each RS232 Serial Port Physical Environmental Power AC Models IEC 320 C14 Inlet 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 Watts Max Optional Secondary IEC 320 C14 Inlet Available on Some Models DC Models Terminal Strip 48 VDC Operating Temperature 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C Storage Temperature 4 F to 128 F 20 C to 70 C Humidity 10 to 90 RH Non Condensing Venting Side vents are used to dissipate heat generated within the unit When mounting the unit in an equipment rack make certain to allow adequate clearance for venting Apx 1 Appendices A 2 RSM xRy Series Units Power Input Output Voltage RSM 16R16 1 RSM 8R8 1 and RSM 2R4 1 Series 100 120 VAC 50 60 Hz RSM 16R16 2 RSM 8R8 2 and RSM 2R4 2 Series 208 240 VAC 50 60 Hz AC Input Feed RSM 16R16 Series and RSM 8R8 Series 20 Amps Max Input Feed per Inlet RSM 2R4 1 Series 15 Amps Max Input Feed RSM 2R4 2 Series 10 Amps Max Input Feed AC Inlets RSM 16R16 Series Four 4 IEC320 C20 RSM 8R8 Series Two 2 IEC320 C20 Optional Secondary IEC 320 C20 Inlet Available on S
322. ut are not allowed to create connections between ports Plug Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines the default Plug Access setting for new TACACS users Defaults Administrator and SuperUser All Plugs On User undefined ViewOnly undefined Notes Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Access parameter is not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units Administrator and SuperUser level accounts always have access to all plugs User level accounts will only have access to the plugs that are defined via the Plug Access parameter ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the On Off status of permitted plugs but are not allowed to invoke switching and reboot commands Plug Group Access RSM xRy Series Units Only Determines the default Plug Group Access setting for new TACACS users For more information please refer to Section 5 6 Defaults Administrator and SuperUser All Plug Groups On User undefined ViewOnly undefined Notes Power Control functions are only available on RSM xRy Series units The Plug Group Access parameter is not available on standard TSM Series units or standard RSM Series units In order to use this feature Plug Groups must first be defined as described in Section 5 6 Administrator and SuperUser level accounts will always have access to all plug groups User Level accounts will only have access to the plug groups that ar
323. with the type of power source indicated on the instrument nameplate If you are not sure of the type of power service available please contact your local power company Reliable earthing grounding of this unit must be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections when connecting to power strips rather than directly to the branch circuit Some TSM RSM include an optional secondary power inlet in order to allow connection to a secondary power supply RSM 16R16 series units include four power inlets split between two branches 4 1 2 Installing the Power Supply Cable Keeper The TSM RSM includes a cable keeper which is designed to prevent the AC power supply cable from being accidentally disconnected from the unit When attaching power supply cable s to the unit first swing the cable keeper out of the way then plug the power cable securely into the power input When the cable is in place snap the cable keeper over the plug to secure the cable to the unit 4 1 Hardware Installation C NDA Screw Figure 4 1 Terminal Block Assembly TSM Series DC Units Only 48V 0 1A GROUND SCREW D O 48V 48V A B Figure 4 2 Terminal Block Assembly RSM Series DC Units Only 4 1 3 DC Powered Units When connecting a DC Powered TSM Series or RSM Series unit to your DC Power source note that the DC terminal block is designed for connection to two separate power sources First remove the pr
324. word The password that will be used when logging into your email server Default undefined Auth Type The Authentication type the TSM RSM allows you to select None Plain Login or CRAM MD5 Authentication Default None From Name The name that will appear in the From field in email sent by the TSM RSM Default undefined From Address The email address that will appear in the From field in email sent by the TSM RSM Default undefined To Address The address es that will receive email messages generated by the TSM RSM Note that up to three To addresses may be defined and that when Alarm Configuration parameters are selected as described in Section 7 you may then designate these addresses as recipients for email messages that are generated by the alarms Default undefined Send Test Email Sends a test email using the parameters that are currently defined for the Email configuration menu 5 72 Basic Configuration 5 10 Save User Selected Parameters It is strongly recommended to save all user defined parameters to a file as described in Section 15 This will allow quick recovery in the event of accidental deletion or reconfiguration of port parameters When changing configuration parameters via the Text Interface make certain that the TSM RSM has saved the newly defined parameters before exiting from command mode To save parameters press the Esc key several times until you have exited fro

RSM-8R8

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents